WO2006100951A1 - Circuit for driving display apparatus and method for driving display apparatus - Google Patents
Circuit for driving display apparatus and method for driving display apparatus Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2006100951A1 WO2006100951A1 PCT/JP2006/304897 JP2006304897W WO2006100951A1 WO 2006100951 A1 WO2006100951 A1 WO 2006100951A1 JP 2006304897 W JP2006304897 W JP 2006304897W WO 2006100951 A1 WO2006100951 A1 WO 2006100951A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- signal
- image
- output
- data
- pixel
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims description 16
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 24
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 claims description 31
- 230000007274 generation of a signal involved in cell-cell signaling Effects 0.000 claims description 25
- 230000009466 transformation Effects 0.000 claims description 7
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 abstract description 158
- 230000015654 memory Effects 0.000 abstract description 82
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 abstract description 2
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 description 26
- 238000013507 mapping Methods 0.000 description 26
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 24
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 17
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 15
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 14
- 230000009977 dual effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- 239000003990 capacitor Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000002834 transmittance Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000014509 gene expression Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000010409 thin film Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000010408 film Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000003754 machining Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005498 polishing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000844 transformation Methods 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
- G09G3/34—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
- G09G3/36—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source using liquid crystals
- G09G3/3611—Control of matrices with row and column drivers
- G09G3/3685—Details of drivers for data electrodes
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/001—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes using specific devices not provided for in groups G09G3/02 - G09G3/36, e.g. using an intermediate record carrier such as a film slide; Projection systems; Display of non-alphanumerical information, solely or in combination with alphanumerical information, e.g. digital display on projected diapositive as background
- G09G3/003—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes using specific devices not provided for in groups G09G3/02 - G09G3/36, e.g. using an intermediate record carrier such as a film slide; Projection systems; Display of non-alphanumerical information, solely or in combination with alphanumerical information, e.g. digital display on projected diapositive as background to produce spatial visual effects
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2300/00—Aspects of the constitution of display devices
- G09G2300/04—Structural and physical details of display devices
- G09G2300/0439—Pixel structures
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2310/00—Command of the display device
- G09G2310/02—Addressing, scanning or driving the display screen or processing steps related thereto
- G09G2310/0264—Details of driving circuits
- G09G2310/0297—Special arrangements with multiplexing or demultiplexing of display data in the drivers for data electrodes, in a pre-processing circuitry delivering display data to said drivers or in the matrix panel, e.g. multiplexing plural data signals to one D/A converter or demultiplexing the D/A converter output to multiple columns
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a matrix display device such as an active matrix liquid crystal display device, and more particularly to a drive circuit for driving data signal lines in such a display device.
- liquid crystal display devices that provide stereoscopic display by causing binocular parallax to a user have been provided.
- a parallax barrier is provided on the liquid crystal panel to display different images for two viewpoints corresponding to the left and right eyes.
- DV liquid crystal display device a liquid crystal display device that displays different images for two users.
- a display image seen from the right side and a display image seen from the left side can be made different. Therefore, for example, this DV liquid crystal display device can be installed in a car to display different images for the driver and passengers in the passenger seat, or installed at a counter such as a bank to display different images for customers and staff. It can be displayed.
- FIG. 30 (A) is a plan view schematically showing the arrangement of the pixel formation portions (hereinafter referred to as “pixel arrangement”) for forming the pixels of the image to be displayed in the DV liquid crystal display device
- FIG. FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the pixel arrangement (FIG. 30A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line YY in FIG. 30B).
- each pixel constituting an image to be displayed is composed of an R (red) subpixel, a G (green) subpixel, and a B (blue) subpixel.
- an R (red) pixel forming portion also referred to as “R subpixel”
- a G (green) pixel forming portion also referred to as “G subpixel”.
- a B (blue) pixel formation portion also referred to as “B sub-pixel”.
- the DV liquid crystal display device has a large number of elements arranged in a matrix.
- the pixel array which has a pixel forming power, includes a column in which R subpixels are arranged, a column in which G subpixels are arranged, and a row in which B subpixels are arranged, and R subpixels arranged every other column and Three subpixels consisting of the G subpixel and the B subpixel form one pixel in the image to be displayed (the DV liquid crystal display device has two images to be displayed and one of them).
- the parallax barrier 84b As shown in FIG. 30B, the light emitted from each sub-pixel 90 is selectively blocked, and each sub-pixel 90 Of the light emitted from the DV liquid crystal display device, only the light that passes through the slit 84s formed in the parallax barrier 84b is emitted from the DV liquid crystal display device. That is, light is emitted only in the ranges indicated by ⁇ b and ⁇ g in FIG.
- the user located on the left side in front of the display surface of the DV liquid crystal display device has the third B subpixel from the left among the four subpixels shown in the figure.
- the first subpixel group composed of subpixels selected every other column is for the user (viewpoint) located on the left side.
- a second pixel group that forms an image to be displayed and has a sub-pixel power other than the first sub-pixel group (which is also a pixel power selected every other column) is a user (viewpoint) located on the right side.
- the display image when viewed from the left side is different from the display image when viewed from the right side.
- Patent Document 1 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-206089
- Patent Document 2 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-287406
- Patent Document 3 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 62-278591
- a dual view display device such as a DV liquid crystal display device
- two images to be displayed respectively in two regions where viewpoints can be arranged typically Is a format of input data that represents a left image that is displayed when viewed from the left and a right image that is displayed when viewed from the right.
- Two types of input formats are possible as shown in Fig. 5 (A) and Fig. 5 (B).
- the input format shown in Fig. 5 (A) is a format in which the left image data DaL and the right image data DaR are input simultaneously as two digital image signals (hereinafter referred to as "DV2 simultaneous input format"). Is simply called “simultaneous input format").
- the input format shown in Fig. 5 (B) is input as a single signal indicating combined image data, which is image data in a format in which left image data DaL and right image data DaR are arranged in the horizontal direction (display row direction).
- Format that is, the data for one line of the left image and the data for one line of the right image are alternately input (hereinafter referred to as “DV display mapping input format” or “alternate input format”).
- DV display mapping input format or “alternate input format”.
- the binocular parallax is generated by the parallax barrier as described above, so that a three-dimensional display is obtained.
- the 3D liquid crystal display device that performs the display.
- the sub-pixel 70 is arranged so that the horizontal direction (row direction) is the longitudinal direction, and each pixel constituting the color image is arranged in the vertical direction (column A configuration (hereinafter referred to as “horizontal pixel arrangement configuration”) in which three subpixels 70, which are adjacent to each other in the direction (R), G subpixel, and B subpixel, are also proposed (for example, FIG. (See 7 (b)).
- the parallax barrier is smaller than the above configuration in which the sub-pixels are arranged so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction (hereinafter referred to as “vertically long pixel arrangement configuration”). Since the distance dl between 54b and the sub-pixel 70 can be made relatively large, reflection of the left and right images can be prevented without requiring high processing accuracy.
- a DV liquid crystal display device having a horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration requires a data driver that outputs a drive signal in a format corresponding to the pixel arrangement configuration, and data used in a DV liquid crystal display device having a vertically long pixel arrangement configuration.
- the driver cannot be used as it is.
- the IC is dedicated to a DV liquid crystal display with a horizontally long pixel arrangement, and a DV liquid crystal display or SV liquid crystal with a vertically long pixel arrangement. It cannot be used with display devices.
- the present invention has been made to solve the above-described problem, and is a data signal line drive circuit having flexibility in display data input format and Z or drive signal output format in a matrix display device.
- the purpose is to provide.
- a first aspect of the present invention includes a plurality of data signal lines extending in the column direction, a plurality of scanning signal lines intersecting with the plurality of data signal lines and extending in the row direction, and the plurality of data signal lines. And a plurality of sub-pixel forming portions arranged in a matrix corresponding to the intersections of the plurality of scanning signal lines, and each sub-pixel forming portion selects a scanning signal line passing through the corresponding intersection.
- a predetermined number of input terminal groups for receiving an image signal representing the image as a serial signal in units of pixels or sub-pixels, and an image signal input from the input terminal group.
- a predetermined number of output terminal groups for outputting as serial signals in units of units or sub-pixels, and input from each input terminal group of the predetermined number of input terminal groups based on a first control signal to which an external force is also applied.
- a first connection switching circuit for switching an output terminal group to output an image signal to be output among the predetermined number of output terminal groups;
- a serial-parallel converter that is provided corresponding to each output terminal group of the predetermined number of output terminal groups, and that inputs an image signal output from the corresponding output terminal group as a serial signal and outputs it as a parallel signal;
- a data signal generation circuit for generating the plurality of data signals based on the parallel signals to be output.
- a second aspect of the present invention is the first aspect of the present invention.
- the plurality of sub-pixel forming units includes a first sub-pixel forming unit group for forming a first image displayed for a first predetermined region where a viewpoint can be arranged, and a first sub-pixel forming unit capable of arranging a viewpoint.
- the predetermined number of input terminal groups includes a first input terminal group for receiving an image signal representing the first or second image, and a second input terminal for receiving the image signal representing the second image.
- Input terminal group
- the predetermined number of output terminal groups are input from a first output terminal group for outputting an image signal input from the first input terminal group and from the first or second input terminal group.
- the first connection switching circuit includes a first output terminal group and an output terminal group to which an image signal to be input is output as the first output terminal group based on the first control signal.
- the second output terminal group is switched between two output terminal groups, and the second input terminal group force is switched to determine whether or not to output the input image signal to the second output terminal group force.
- a third aspect of the present invention is the first aspect of the present invention.
- the data signal generation circuit includes:
- each serial-parallel converter The parallel signal output from each serial-parallel converter is converted into the image by each serial-parallel converter.
- a holding circuit for holding and outputting until the next serial signal representing pixels in one row is input and output as a parallel signal;
- a second connection switching circuit for sequentially selecting and outputting signals constituting the same pixel signal group having a signal power corresponding to data
- a signal generation / output circuit that generates and outputs the plurality of data signals based on a signal output from the second connection switching circuit.
- a fourth aspect of the present invention is the third aspect of the present invention.
- the second connection switching circuit is
- the signals constituting the same pixel signal group are sequentially selected and output based on the first predetermined signal
- the second control signal is a second predetermined signal
- all signals constituting the same pixel signal group are selected and output simultaneously.
- a fifth aspect of the present invention provides a plurality of data signal lines extending in the column direction, a plurality of scanning signal lines intersecting with the plurality of data signal lines and extending in the row direction, and the plurality of data signal lines. And a plurality of subpixel forming portions arranged in a matrix corresponding to the intersections of the plurality of scanning signal lines, and each subpixel forming portion selects a scanning signal line passing through the corresponding intersection.
- a holding circuit for holding an image signal corresponding to the sub-pixel data for at least one row of the image
- the sub-pixels Based on the second control signal to which an external force is also applied, out of the image signals held in the holding circuit, the sub-pixels to be taken in by a predetermined number of sub-pixel forming units forming each of the pixels for at least one row
- a second connection switching circuit for selecting and outputting any or all of the same pixel signal group consisting of signals corresponding to data;
- the plurality of data signals are generated based on a signal output from the second connection switching circuit.
- a data signal generation circuit to be configured,
- the second connection switching circuit is
- the signals constituting the same pixel signal group are sequentially selected and output based on the first predetermined signal
- the second control signal is a second predetermined signal
- all signals constituting the same pixel signal group are selected and output simultaneously.
- a sixth aspect of the present invention is a display device, comprising a drive circuit according to any one of the first to fifth aspects of the present invention.
- the seventh aspect of the present invention is the first image displayed for the first predetermined area where the viewpoint can be arranged and the second image displayed for the second predetermined area where the viewpoint can be arranged.
- the first operation mode for driving the first display device that forms the first and second images to be different from the second image, and the same for the first and second predetermined regions A driving circuit having a second operation mode for driving the second display device that forms the same image so that the image is displayed,
- Each of the first and second display devices is a display device
- a plurality of data signal lines extending in the column direction
- a plurality of scanning signal lines that intersect the plurality of data signal lines and extend in the row direction; and a plurality of sub signal lines arranged in a matrix corresponding to the intersections of the plurality of data signal lines and the plurality of scanning signal lines, respectively.
- a pixel forming portion
- Each sub-pixel forming unit in the first and second display devices takes in a signal on the corresponding data signal line as sub-pixel data when a scanning signal line passing through the corresponding intersection is selected,
- the plurality of subpixel forming portions of the first display device include a first subpixel forming portion group for forming the first image and a second subpixel forming portion for forming the second image.
- the first sub-pixel forming unit group and the second sub-pixel forming unit group are alternately arranged in a line,
- the plurality of sub-pixel forming units of the second display device form the same image, and the driving circuit generates a plurality of data signals representing images to be displayed, and Including a data signal line driving circuit for applying to the data signal line;
- the data signal line driving circuit includes:
- a first input terminal group for receiving the first image or the image signal representing the same image as a serial signal in pixel units or sub-pixel units, and the image signal representing the second image as pixel units or sub-pixels.
- a second input terminal group for receiving as a serial signal in pixel units,
- an image signal representing the first image input from the first input terminal group is applied to a data signal line corresponding to the first sub-pixel forming unit group.
- a power data signal and to apply to the data signal line corresponding to the second sub-pixel forming unit group based on the image signal representing the second image input to the second input terminal group force Generate a data signal,
- a data signal to be applied to the plurality of data signal lines of the second display device is generated based on an image signal representing the same image input from the first input terminal group. It is characterized by doing.
- the eighth aspect of the present invention is the seventh aspect of the present invention.
- the data signal line driving circuit includes:
- the first and second input terminal groups and a predetermined number of output terminal groups for outputting image signals input from the first and second input terminal groups as pixel-unit or sub-pixel unit serial signals; Output image signals input from the input terminal groups of the first and second input terminal groups according to whether the operation mode of the drive circuit is the first operation mode or the second operation mode.
- a connection switching circuit for switching an output terminal group to be switched between the predetermined number of output terminal groups;
- a serial-parallel converter that is provided corresponding to each output terminal group of the predetermined number of output terminal groups, and that inputs an image signal output from the corresponding output terminal group as a serial signal and outputs it as a parallel signal;
- a data signal generation circuit for generating the plurality of data signals based on the parallel signals to be output
- the connection switching circuit is In the first operation mode, a data signal corresponding to the first sub-pixel forming unit group based on a parallel signal output from a serial parallel transformation to which an image signal representing the first image is input.
- a data signal to be applied to the line is generated by the data signal generation circuit, and based on the parallel signal output from the serial / parallel transformation to which the image signal representing the second image is input, the first signal is generated.
- the first and second input terminal groups and the predetermined number of output terminal groups so that the data signal to be applied to the data signal lines corresponding to the two sub-pixel forming unit groups is generated by the data signal generation circuit.
- a data signal to be applied to the plurality of data signal lines in the second display device based on the normal signal output from each series-parallel conversion is the data signal generation circuit.
- the first input terminal group and the predetermined number of output terminal groups are connected to each other as generated by the above.
- a ninth aspect of the present invention there are provided a plurality of data signal lines extending in the column direction, a plurality of scanning signal lines intersecting with the plurality of data signal lines and extending in the row direction, the plurality of data signal lines, and the plurality of data signals lines.
- a plurality of sub-pixel forming portions arranged in a matrix corresponding to each of the intersections with the scanning signal lines, and each sub-pixel forming portion is selected when a scanning signal line passing through the corresponding intersection is selected.
- a display device that captures a signal on a data signal line corresponding to a subpixel data as a drive method for applying a plurality of data signals representing an image to be displayed to the plurality of data signal lines,
- a predetermined number of input terminal groups for receiving image signals representing the image as serial signals in pixel units or sub-pixel units, and image signals input from the input terminal groups as serial signals in pixel units or sub-pixel units
- the first connection switching circuit having a predetermined number of output terminal groups for output as a first input signal
- the first connection switching circuit is input from each input terminal group of the predetermined number of input terminal groups based on a first control signal given by an external force.
- the plurality of data signals based on the parallel signal output in the serial-parallel conversion step. And a data signal generation step of generating a signal.
- a tenth aspect of the present invention is the ninth aspect of the present invention.
- the plurality of sub-pixel forming units includes a first sub-pixel forming unit group for forming a first image displayed for a first predetermined region where a viewpoint can be arranged, and a first sub-pixel forming unit capable of arranging a viewpoint.
- the predetermined number of input terminal groups includes a first input terminal group for receiving an image signal representing the first or second image, and a second input terminal for receiving the image signal representing the second image.
- Input terminal group
- the predetermined number of output terminal groups are input from a first output terminal group for outputting an image signal input from the first input terminal group and from the first or second input terminal group.
- the first input terminal group force is an output terminal group to which an input image signal is to be output, the first output terminal group and the second output terminal group.
- the output terminal group is switched between and whether the image signal input from the second input terminal group outputs the second output terminal group force or not is switched.
- An eleventh aspect of the present invention is the ninth aspect of the present invention.
- the data signal generation step includes
- the parallel signal output in the serial-parallel conversion step is held and output until the next serial signal representing one row of pixels in the image is input and output as a parallel signal in the serial-parallel conversion step. Holding step;
- sub-pixel data to be taken in by a predetermined number of sub-pixel forming units forming each of the pixels for one row of the signals output as parallel signals in the holding step
- a second connection switching step for sequentially selecting and outputting signals constituting the same pixel signal group having a signal power equivalent to
- a twelfth aspect of the present invention is the eleventh aspect of the present invention.
- the second connection switching step includes:
- the method includes selecting and simultaneously outputting all signals constituting the same pixel signal group.
- a thirteenth aspect of the present invention provides a plurality of data signal lines extending in the column direction, a plurality of scanning signal lines intersecting with the plurality of data signal lines and extending in the row direction, and the plurality of data signals.
- a plurality of sub-pixel forming portions arranged in a matrix corresponding to the intersections of the lines and the plurality of scanning signal lines, and each sub-pixel forming portion selects a scanning signal line passing through the corresponding intersection.
- the sub-pixel data to be taken in by a predetermined number of sub-pixel forming units that form each of the pixels for the one row of the image signal is held in the holding step!
- a data signal generating step for generating the plurality of data signals based on the signal output in the second connection switching step
- the second connection switching step includes:
- the second control signal is a first predetermined signal
- the control signal is the second predetermined signal
- the method includes selecting and simultaneously outputting all signals constituting the same pixel signal group.
- a predetermined number of output terminal groups in the first connection switching circuit A data signal to be applied to the data signal line of the display panel is generated on the basis of the normal signal that is also output corresponding to each of the series and parallel transformations. Then, based on the first control signal given from the outside, each input terminal group of the predetermined number of input terminal groups is switched between the predetermined number of output terminal groups. Can be replaced. Therefore, by setting or switching the first control signal, an image signal input from each input terminal group as a signal (display data) representing an image to be displayed is displayed in any appropriate series-parallel manner according to the input format. Can be input to the converter. Therefore, it is possible to input display data of various input formats without separately preparing an interface circuit and appropriately drive the data signal lines of the display panel.
- the signal of the first image displayed for the first predetermined area where the viewpoint can be arranged and the second predetermined area where the viewpoint can be arranged When two image signals, the second image signal displayed at the same time, are input simultaneously (in the case of DV2 simultaneous input format), the first connection switching circuit sets the first control signal.
- the first input terminal group force The first image signal input to the first output terminal group force is output to the corresponding series-parallel variable ⁇ and the second input terminal group force is input to the second input terminal group force.
- the image signal of can be output to the second output terminal group force and given to the corresponding series-parallel variable.
- the first control signal When the first image signal is also input to the first input terminal group force by switching the setting, the first image signal is output to the first output terminal force and applied to the corresponding series-parallel change.
- the second input image group force is input to the second image signal, the second image signal can also be output to the corresponding series-parallel variable by outputting the second output terminal force.
- This corresponds to sub-pixel data to be taken in by a predetermined number of sub-pixel forming portions that form
- the signals constituting the same pixel signal group consisting of the signals are sequentially selected and output, and the data signal to be applied to the data signal line is generated based on the sequentially selected signals.
- a predetermined number of sub-pixel forming portions for example, three sub-pixel forming portions having R sub-pixel, G sub-pixel, and B sub-pixel force) for forming one pixel of an image to be displayed are arranged in the column direction and are the same
- the data signal lines in a display panel configured to be connected to the data signal lines for example, a DV liquid crystal panel having a horizontally long pixel arrangement
- the same pixel signal group is configured based on the first predetermined signal.
- the signals are sequentially selected and output, and the second control signal is the second predetermined signal, all signals constituting the same pixel signal group are selected and output simultaneously. Therefore, by setting or switching the second control signal, the output format of the data signal can be changed to an independent output format for the same pixel signal group, or a time-division output format.
- the data signal line of the display panel can be appropriately driven regardless of the arrangement configuration or the horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration.
- the first subpixel formation is performed based on the image signal representing the first image input from the first input terminal group.
- a data signal to be applied to the data signal line corresponding to the group of pixels is generated, and the second subpixel formation unit group is generated based on the image signal representing the second image input from the second input terminal group.
- a data signal to be applied to the corresponding data signal line is generated, and in the second operation mode, the first and second predetermined regions are applied based on the image signal input from the first input terminal group.
- Data signals to be applied to the plurality of data signal lines of the second display device that displays the same image are generated.
- the data signal line is connected to both the first display device such as a DV liquid crystal display device and the second display device such as an SV liquid crystal display device.
- a driving circuit that can be used for driving can be provided.
- FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an overall configuration of a liquid crystal display device according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing an equivalent circuit of one sub-pixel forming unit in the first embodiment.
- FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view for explaining the structure of the liquid crystal panel in the first embodiment.
- FIG. 4 is a plan view (A) and a cross-sectional view (B) schematically showing a configuration for realizing dual view display in the first embodiment.
- FIG. 5 is a diagram (A, B) showing a format of input data represented by an image signal to be supplied to the data driver in the first embodiment.
- FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data driver in the first embodiment.
- FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a truth table showing the operation of the input-side selector in the data driver according to the above configuration example
- FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a truth table showing the operation of the output-side selector.
- FIG. 8 is a timing chart (A to C) for explaining the operation of the input side selector in the data driver according to the above configuration example.
- FIG. 9 is a timing chart (A to F) for explaining the operation of the output side selector for time division output in the data driver according to the above configuration example.
- FIG. 10 is a timing chart (A to G) for explaining the operation (mainly on the input side) of the data driver according to the above configuration example in the two-system simultaneous input mode.
- FIG. 11 is a timing chart (A to I) for explaining the operation (mainly on the output side) of the data driver according to the above configuration example in the two-system simultaneous input mode.
- FIG. 12 is a timing chart (A to F) for explaining the operation (mainly on the input side) in the display mapping input mode of the data driver according to the above configuration example.
- FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing a first modification of the data driver in the first embodiment.
- FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing a second modification of the data driver in the first embodiment.
- FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a truth table showing the operation of the output side selector in the second modified example.
- FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a data driver for liquid crystal display according to a second embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 19 is a timing chart (A to E) for explaining the operation of the input side selector in the data driver according to the second embodiment.
- FIG. 20 is a timing chart (A to E) for explaining the operation of the output-side selector in the independent output mode in the data driver according to the second embodiment.
- FIG. 22 is a timing chart for explaining the operation (mainly on the input side) of the data driver according to the second embodiment in the simultaneous input mode when driving a DV liquid crystal panel having a vertically long pixel arrangement configuration (A) ⁇ F).
- FIG. 23 is a timing chart for explaining the operation (mainly on the output side) in the independent output mode of the data driver according to the second embodiment when driving a DV liquid crystal panel having a vertically long pixel arrangement configuration. ⁇ I).
- FIG. 24 is a timing chart for explaining the operation (mainly on the input side) in the display mapping input mode of the data driver according to the second embodiment when driving a DV liquid crystal panel having a vertically long pixel arrangement configuration. ⁇ F).
- FIG. 25 is a timing chart for explaining the operation (mainly on the input side) in the simultaneous input mode of the data driver according to the second embodiment when driving a DV liquid crystal panel having a horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration. ⁇ F).
- FIG.26 Second implementation when driving a DV LCD panel with a horizontally long pixel configuration 6 is a timing chart (A to F) for explaining the operation (mainly on the input side) in the display mapping input mode of the data driver according to the embodiment.
- FIG. 27 is a timing chart for explaining the operation (mainly on the input side) in the normal display input mode of the data driver according to the second embodiment when driving an SV liquid crystal panel with a vertically or horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration. (A to F).
- FIG. 28 is a timing chart for explaining the operation (mainly on the output side) in the independent output mode of the data driver according to the second embodiment when driving an SV liquid crystal panel having a vertically long pixel arrangement configuration. ⁇ I).
- FIG. 29 is a timing chart for explaining the operation (mainly on the output side) in the time division output mode of the data driver according to the second embodiment when driving an SV liquid crystal panel having a horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration. ⁇ I).
- FIG. 30 is a diagram (A to C) showing a pixel arrangement of a conventional dual view liquid crystal display device. Explanation of symbols
- TFT Thin film transistor
- FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the liquid crystal display device according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
- This liquid crystal display device is different from each other in two areas where viewpoints can be arranged.
- Display device that is, a DV (dual view) liquid crystal display device that can display different images when looking at a predetermined angle force tilted left or right on the display screen.
- the display control circuit 200 includes a data driver 300 as a data signal line driving circuit, a gate driver 400 as a scanning signal line driving circuit, and an active matrix liquid crystal panel 600.
- the image displayed when looking at the left force toward the display screen is called “left image”, and the image displayed when looking at the right force is called “right image” t t.
- a liquid crystal panel 600 as a display unit in the liquid crystal display device includes image data Dvl for displaying a left image and image data for displaying a right image from a predetermined external video source (CPU or the like). Dv2 and a control signal TS for controlling the operation timing are received. Note that the original image for displaying the left image and the right image on the liquid crystal panel 600 is displayed in the horizontal direction so that it is displayed correctly by being displayed only in the odd or even columns in the display column of the liquid crystal panel 600. It is assumed that it has been compressed (halved) in the (display line direction). For example, when the display screen is composed of 640 columns and 480 rows, the original image for displaying the left image and the right image is composed of 320 columns and 480 rows.
- the liquid crystal panel 600 includes three scanning signal lines Lg that are three times the number of horizontal scanning lines m (3m) in the image represented by the image data Dvl and Dv2, and the 3m scanning signal lines Lg. 2n data signal lines Ls intersecting with each other, and 3m x 2n subpixels formed corresponding to the intersections of these 3m scanning signal lines Lg and 2n data signal lines Ls, respectively Part Ps (l, l) to Ps (3m, 2n). Further, the liquid crystal panel 600 is provided in common to the pixel electrodes included in the sub-pixel forming portions Ps (l, l) to Ps (3m, 2n), and is opposed to the pixel electrodes with the liquid crystal layer interposed therebetween. Are provided with a common electrode.
- 3m ⁇ 2n sub-pixel forming portions Ps (l, l) to Ps (3m, 2n) in the liquid crystal panel 600 are adjacent to the extending direction of the data signal line Ls, that is, the column direction.
- the R subpixel, the G subpixel, and the B subpixel are arranged in a matrix in units of three subpixel formation portions, and the color image to be displayed on the liquid crystal panel 600 by the three subpixel formation portions.
- Each pixel of the left image represented by the image data Dvl and the right image represented by the image data Dv2 (hereinafter referred to as one pixel of the image to be displayed).
- the corresponding three sub-pixel forming portions are indicated by “pixel forming portion” t ⁇ and the symbol “Pix”).
- the display control circuit 200 receives the image data Dvl, Dv2 and the timing control signal TS sent from the outside, and converts the image signals corresponding to the image data Dvl, Dv2 respectively to the digital image signal DV1, DV1.
- Data start pulse signal DSP, data clock signal DCK, latch strobe signal LS, gate start pulse signal GS P, and gate to output as DV2 and control the timing of displaying images on LCD panel 600 Outputs various signals including clock signal GCK.
- the digital image signals DV1, DV2, the data start pulse signal DSP, the data clock signal DCK, and the latch strobe signal LS are data.
- the gate start pulse signal GSP and the gate clock signal GCK are supplied to the driver 300, and are supplied to the gate dryer OO.
- the display control circuit 200 generates a polarity switching control signal for AC drive of the liquid crystal panel 600 based on the clock signal and the like, and this is used as the data driver 300 and a common electrode drive circuit (not shown). Supply. Since the polarity switching signal and the AC driving based on the polarity switching signal are not directly related to the present invention, the description thereof will be omitted below.
- the data driver 300 generates an analog voltage for driving the liquid crystal panel 600 based on the digital image signals DV1, DV2, the data clock signal DCK, the data start pulse signal DSP, the latch strobe signal LS, and the like. Signals D (l), D (2),..., D (2n) are generated and applied to 2n data signal lines Ls in the liquid crystal panel 600, respectively.
- the gate dry 400 is applied to each scanning signal line to sequentially select the scanning signal lines in the liquid crystal panel 600 by 1Z3 horizontal scanning period. Generates scanning signals G (l), G (2), G (3), ..., G (3m) to be generated, and active scans to select each of all scanning signal lines in turn. The application of the ⁇ signal to each scanning signal line is repeated with one vertical scanning period as a cycle.
- the data signals D (1) to D (2n) based on the digital image signals DV1 and DV2 are applied to the data signal line Ls, and the scanning signals G (1) to G (3m) is applied to the scanning signal line Lg.
- a common voltage signal is applied to the common electrode by a common electrode drive circuit (not shown).
- the liquid crystal panel 600 changes the light transmittance by applying a voltage corresponding to the digital image signal DV1, DV2 to the liquid crystal layer, and receives the image data Dvl, Dv2 received from the external video source
- the left and right images represented by are displayed. Depending on the viewing angle of the display screen, one of these images appears clearly bright and the other appears dark or completely invisible.
- the liquid crystal panel 600 includes 2n data signal lines Ls connected to the data driver 300 and 3m scanning signal lines Lg connected to the gate driver 400, and the 2n data signal lines Ls and 3m
- the scanning signal lines Lg are arranged in a grid pattern so that each data signal line Ls and each scanning signal line Lg intersect each other. Then, 3m ⁇ 2n sub-pixel forming portions Ps (1, l) to Ps (3m, 2n) are provided corresponding to the intersections of the 2n data signal lines and the 3m scanning signal lines Lg, respectively. ing.
- each pixel of the color image to be displayed by the liquid crystal panel 600 is in the column direction (the data signal line extends).
- 3m x 2n sub-pixel forming parts Ps (l in the liquid crystal panel 600 are formed by a pixel forming part Pix consisting of three sub-pixel forming parts of R sub-pixel, G sub-pixel and B sub-pixel adjacent to each other in the direction).
- , l) to Ps (3m, 2n) are arranged in a matrix with these three subpixel formation units as units (see Fig. 1).
- each sub-pixel forming portion Ps (i, j) has a source terminal connected to the data signal line Ls that passes through the corresponding intersection and a scanning signal that passes through the corresponding intersection.
- Thin film transistor with gate terminal connected to line Lg hereinafter referred to as ⁇ TFT 10
- the pixel electrode Ep connected to the drain terminal of the TFT 10
- the common electrode (also referred to as “counter electrode”) Ec provided and the pixel electrode Ep provided in common to the 3m ⁇ 2n sub-pixel formation portions Ps (l, l) to Ps (3m, 2 ⁇ )
- the common electrode Ec and not shown !, color filters, various optical compensation films (polarizing plates, etc. ) Is a CF substrate.
- the liquid crystal capacitance Clc formed by the pixel electrode Ep, the common electrode Ec, and the liquid crystal layer sandwiched between them constitutes a pixel capacitance for holding a voltage corresponding to sub-pixel data.
- an auxiliary capacitor is provided in parallel with the liquid crystal capacitor Clc, which should surely hold the voltage in the pixel capacitor.
- the auxiliary capacitor is not directly related to the present invention, its description and illustration are omitted.
- FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the structure of the liquid crystal panel 600 as described above.
- the liquid crystal panel 600 includes a pair of transparent insulating substrates, a TFT substrate 66 and a CF substrate 56, and a liquid crystal layer 60 sandwiched between the TFT substrate 66 and the CF substrate 56.
- the viewpoint (eyepoint) should be placed in front ( Display the image represented by the above image data Dvl and Dv2
- Polarizing plates 68 and 55 are attached to the outer surfaces of the TFT substrate 66 and the CF substrate 56 in the liquid crystal panel 600 (the main surface opposite to the side where the liquid crystal layer 60 is disposed), respectively.
- the data signal lines Ls and And the scanning signal line Lg On the inner surface of the TFT substrate 66 (the main surface on the side where the liquid crystal layer 60 is disposed), the TFT circuit section 64 including the TFT 10 of each of the sub-pixel forming sections Ps (l, l) to Ps (3m, 2n) and the pixel electrode Ep, are formed on the inner surface of the CF substrate 56.
- a color filter 58 configured to correspond to the arrangement shown in FIG.
- a transparent parallax barrier substrate 52 is disposed outside the CF substrate 56, and the parallax barrier layer 54 including the parallax barrier 54b is formed on the inner surface of the parallax barrier substrate 52 with a light-shielding metal or It is formed from greaves.
- the parallax barrier layer 54 has a slit 54s, and selectively blocks light that passes through the TFT substrate 66, the liquid crystal layer 60, the CF substrate 56, and the like from the knock light and moves forward.
- a parallax is generated for an image formed by the sub-pixel forming portions Ps (l, l) to Ps (3 m, 2n) realized by the liquid crystal layer 60, the color filter 58, and the like. That is, the parallax barrier layer 54 has a parallax on the image formed by the sub-pixel forming portions Ps (l, l) to Ps (3m, 2n) so that different images are displayed for at least two viewpoints. It functions as a parallax generator that generates
- FIG. 4 schematically shows the configuration of the liquid crystal panel 600 as described above.
- FIG. 4A is a plan view showing the configuration for a dual-view display (hereinafter abbreviated as “DV display”).
- FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration for DV display, and corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along line XX in FIG. 4A.
- FIG. 4 (A) and FIG. 4 (B) the configuration and operation for realizing DV display in the present embodiment will be described.
- Ps (l, l) to Ps (3m, 2n) realized by the TFT circuit portion 64, the liquid crystal layer 60, the color filter 58, etc. without distinction.
- each subpixel 70 is any of the R subpixel, the G subpixel, and the B subpixel.
- the subpixel 70 with “R1” is an R subpixel for forming the left image
- the subpixel 70 with “Gr” is the G subpixel for forming the right image.
- each sub-pixel 70 is arranged such that its longitudinal direction is the row direction (direction in which the scanning signal line Lg extends),
- the sub-pixel forming portions Ps (l, 1) to Ps (3m, 2n) the sub-pixels 70 constituting each column are only sub-pixels for forming one of the left image and the right image. Consists of. Then, a column composed of only sub-pixels for forming the left image and a column composed of only the sub-pixels for forming the right image are alternately arranged.
- the parallax barrier layer 54 has slits 54 s extending in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of each sub-pixel 70, that is, the column direction (direction in which the data signal line Ls extends), and one slit 54 s for every two columns of the sub-pixel 70.
- the distance dl between the parallax barrier 54b and the sub-pixel 70 corresponds to the distance between the color filter 58 and the parallax barrier 54b shown in FIG.
- each subpixel 70 is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is the row direction (horizontal pixel arrangement configuration), and the slit 54s in the parallax barrier layer 54 is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of each subpixel.
- the slit 84s extends in parallel to the longitudinal direction of each subpixel 90 even if the distance dl between the parallax nolia 54b and the subpixel 70 is increased, the left and right images are projected. It is hard to produce. Therefore, according to the above configuration, the left and right images are reflected without requiring high processing accuracy. Can be prevented.
- the distance d2 between the viewing barrier 84b and the subpixel 90 is about 50 ⁇ , whereas the thickness of the glass as the CF substrate 56 is about 700.
- special processing such as polishing of the glass substrate is required when manufacturing a conventional DV liquid crystal panel.
- the above-described configuration in the present embodiment in addition to not requiring high machining accuracy as high as conventional, such special work is unnecessary and reduced, so that the manufacturing cost is suppressed. be able to.
- the number of scanning signal lines Lg is three times that of the conventional vertical pixel arrangement (Fig. 30).
- the number of data signal lines Ls is 1Z3 in the case of the conventional vertically long pixel arrangement configuration. It can be.
- the data driver 300 in this embodiment needs to generate data signals D (1) to D (2n) so as to enable DV display (dual view display) according to the configuration of the liquid crystal panel 600. .
- DV display dual view display
- FIGS. 5A and 5B show the format of input data represented by a digital image signal to be supplied to the data driver 300.
- FIG. 5A the left image data DaL and the right image data DaR are simultaneously supplied to the display control circuit 200 as image data Dvl and Dv2, and the image data
- the digital image signal DV1 which is the signal of the left image represented by Dv 1 and the digital image signal DV2 which is the signal of the right image represented by image data Dv2 are simultaneously input to the data driver 300 (hereinafter this input format is referred to as “ DV2 simultaneous input format ”).
- this input format is referred to as “ DV2 simultaneous input format ”).
- image data in a format in which the left image data DaL and the right image data DaR are arranged in the row direction (horizontal direction) (hereinafter referred to as “combined image data” t, ), And an image signal represented by the combined image data may be input to the data driver 300 (hereinafter, this input format is referred to as “DV display mapping input format”).
- This combined image data is a matrix of m rows 2 X 3n columns 2 x 3 x m x n sub-pixel data power image data arranged in a format, where the first half of each row consists of sub-pixel data representing the left image and the second half consists of sub-pixel data representing the right image .
- the DV display mapping input type such 2 ⁇ 3 ⁇ m ⁇ n sub-pixel data are sequentially input to the data driver 300 as one digital image signal DV.
- the left image data DaL and the right image data DaR are data with the same contents
- the normal display that is not DV display is used regardless of whether the input format is DV2 simultaneous input format or DV display mapping input format. (The same image is displayed for any viewpoint in front of the display screen).
- FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data driver 300 that can support both the DV2 system simultaneous input format and the DV display mapping input format.
- the data driver 300 includes an input side selector 302 as a first connection switching circuit and six line memories functioning as a serial-parallel converter, that is, a left image red line memory. 304R1, left line green line memory 304G1, left line blue line memory 304B 1, right line red line memory 304Rr, right line green line memory 304Gr and right line blue line memory 304Br, and sub-line for one display line
- a latch circuit 306 as a holding means for holding a signal indicating pixel data
- an output side selector 308 as a second connection switching circuit
- a DZA conversion circuit 310 a DZA conversion circuit 310
- an output buffer 312 are provided.
- the digital image signal DV1 representing the left image is the red input signal R—Lin for the left image, the green input signal G—Lin, and the blue input signal B—Lin.
- the red input signal R—Rin, the green input signal G—Rin, and the blue input signal B—Rin for the right image are input from the display control circuit 200 to the input side selector 302, respectively.
- the input side selection control signal Sa is given from the display control circuit 200 to the input side selector 302 as a control signal for selecting the input format, and the output side selection control is used as a control signal for switching the output signal in a time division manner.
- Signals Sb and Sc are supplied from the display control circuit 200 to the output side selector 308.
- the latch strobe signal LS is supplied from the display control circuit 200 to the latch circuit 306, and a plurality of reference voltages are supplied to the DZA conversion circuit 310 as well as a reference voltage generating circuit power (not shown).
- the input side selection control signal Sa is also given to the above line memos U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br. Also serves as an in-memory enable signal.
- the input-side selector 302 includes the first input terminal group for inputting the input signals R—Lin, G—Lin, and B—Lin that constitute the digital image signal DV1 representing the left image.
- the first output terminal group 1Y1, 1Y2, 1Y3 for outputting image signals to the line memory 304R1, 304G1, 304B1 for the left image and the image signals to the line memories 304Rr, 30 4Gr, 304Br for the right image, respectively.
- the second output terminal groups 1Y4, 1Y5, and 1Y6 are respectively provided for outputting.
- FIG. 7A shows a truth table showing the operation of the input side selector 302. This figure 7
- the input side selector 302 uses the first and second input terminal groups A1 to F1 as the first image signals as they are. And output from the second output terminal group 1Y1 to 1Y6.
- the input-side selector 302 sends the image signals given to the first input terminal groups A1 to C1 to the second output terminal groups 1Y4 to: The second input terminal group D1 to F1 is not used.
- "X" indicates that the output signal is indefinite or invalid.
- the input side selector 302 receives a signal representing the left image and the right image in the DV2 system simultaneous input format (hereinafter, the operation mode at this time is referred to as "two systems simultaneous input mode").
- the input side selection control signal Sa as shown in Fig. 8 (B) is given and signals representing the left image and the right image are received in the DV display mapping format (hereinafter, the operation mode at this time is displayed as ⁇ Display In the “mapping input mode”, an input side selection control signal Sa as shown in FIG.
- the input-side selector 302 operates in the two-system simultaneous input mode, and therefore, the input-side selection control signal Sa as shown in FIG. Given by.
- the output side selector 308 has 2n block power (2n is the number of data signal lines Ls), and each block receives digital signals A2, B2, and C2 corresponding to three sub-pixel data. According to the truth table shown in (B), select one of those signals A2, B2, C2 Output as the Y signal. Therefore, when the output-side selector 308 receives the output-side selection control signals Sb and Sc as shown in FIG. 9B, the digital image signal input from the latch circuit 306 is shown in FIG. 9C. In this way, the output side selection control signals Sb and Sc are output in a time-sharing manner according to switching.
- the switching order of the output side selection control signals Sb and Sc for the time division output corresponds to the horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration shown in FIGS.
- the output side selection control signals Sb and Sc are switched every 1Z3 period of each horizontal scanning period, and the switching timing is gated as shown in FIGS. 9 (D) to 9 (F). This is synchronized with the selection of the scanning signal line Lg by the dryino O 0.
- the input-side selector 302 is supplied with the input-side selection control signal Sa shown in FIG. 10 (A) and two digital image signals DV1, DV2 representing the left image and the right image.
- the input side selector 302 receives the digital image signal R—Lin, G—Lin, B—Lin, R—Rin, G as shown in FIG.
- FIGS. 10C and 10D show the input when the digital image signal corresponding to the second line of the image to be displayed (the left image and the right image) is input to the input side selector 302.
- the line memo U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br holds the digital image signal corresponding to the first line of the image to be displayed. .
- Line memos U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br are digital image signals R-Lin, G-Lin, B_Lin, R- Rin, G—Rin, B—Rin are output in parallel for each line of the image to be displayed.
- the three line memories 304R1, 304G1, and 304B1 input digital image signals representing the left image serially in units of pixels and output them in parallel for each row of the left image.
- the other three line memories 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br input the digital image signal representing the right image serially in pixel units, one line at a time for the right image. It functions as the second series-parallel variable that outputs in parallel.
- the latch circuit 306 receives the digital image signal for one line output from the line memories 304R1, 304 Gl, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br to the normal output, and the latch shown in FIG. Latching based on the strobe signal LS, the digital image signal for one row is output as shown in Fig. 10 (F) and Fig. 10 (G) (Fig. 10 (F) and Fig. 10 (G) are output) This shows the digital image signal output to each of the blocks I and II of the side selector 308).
- the latch circuit 306 is connected to three sub-pixel forming portions (R sub-pixel, G sub-pixel, and B sub-pixel) for forming one pixel of an image to be displayed during one horizontal scanning period.
- R sub-pixel, G sub-pixel, and B sub-pixel sub-pixel forming portions
- a digital image signal for one row is input from the latch circuit 306 to the output-side selector 308 (FIGS. 11D and 11E), and FIG. Output side selection control signals Sb and Sc shown in FIG.
- the values of the output side selection control signals Sb, Sc are switched every 1Z3 horizontal scanning period in each horizontal scanning period.
- the output-side selector 308 should capture the three sub-pixel forming portions (R sub-pixel, G sub-pixel and B sub-pixel) that form each pixel in one row of the image to be displayed (left image and right image).
- the signal Y is output in a time division manner in one horizontal scanning period (1H period) (FIG. 11 (F) and FIG. 11 (G) are output side selectors).
- the digital image signals respectively output from the blocks I and II of FIG. The order in this time-division output corresponds to the horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration shown in FIGS.
- the output side selector 308 performs the sequential selection of the scanning signal line Lg in the liquid crystal panel 600. In conjunction with this, the output signal is switched between the same pixel signal group.
- the eight conversion circuit 310 converts the digital image signal Y output from the output side selector 308 (each block thereof) into an analog voltage signal based on a plurality of reference voltages supplied from a reference voltage generation circuit (not shown). Convert.
- the analog voltage signal thus obtained is output from the data driver 300 as data signals D (1) to D (2n) for one row via an output buffer 312 configured by a voltage hollow or the like as impedance conversion means. It is output as shown in Fig. 11 (H) and Fig. 11 (1).
- the DZA conversion circuit 310 and the output buffer 312 constitute a signal generation output circuit that generates and outputs a data signal D (j) based on the digital image signal Y from the output side selector 308.
- the signal generation output circuit constitutes a signal generation circuit for the data signal together with the latch circuit 306 and the output side selector 308.
- the liquid crystal non-channel 600 ⁇ ! /, And the data signal line Ls connected to the sub-pixel forming portion where each pixel of the left image is to be formed are connected to the same pixel signal group xRy. — L, xGy_L, xBy—L
- the data signal is applied in a time-sharing manner, and the same pixel signal group xRy—R is connected to the data signal line Ls connected to the sub-pixel forming part that should form each pixel of the right image.
- the TFT 10 becomes conductive, and the data passes through the intersection corresponding to the sub-pixel formation portion P s (i, j).
- the data signal D (j) of the signal line Ls is captured as subpixel data, and a voltage corresponding to the subpixel data is held in the pixel capacitor Clc.
- the light transmittance of the liquid crystal layer is controlled based on the subpixel data taken into each subpixel formation portion Ps (i, j), and this is combined with the action of the parallax barrier layer 54 as the parallax generation portion.
- dual view display is realized.
- the input-side selector 302 is supplied with the input-side selection control signal Sa shown in FIG. 12 (A), and the left image data DaL and the right image data as shown in FIG. 5 (B).
- One digital image signal DV corresponding to combined image data in the form of DaR arranged in the row direction is input terminal group Al, Bl, C1 as digital image signals R_Lin, G_Lin, B_Lin shown in Fig. 12 (B) Power is input serially in ij pixel units.
- the input-side selector 302 in the first half of each horizontal scanning period, digital image signals xR y_L, xGy_L, xBy— L is output from the first output terminal group 1Y1 ⁇ : LY3 is supplied to the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, respectively, and in the second half of each horizontal scanning period, digital image signals representing the right image xRy—R, xGy_R, xBy—R are output from the second output terminal group 1 Y4 ⁇ : LY6, respectively, and supplied to the line memories 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br.
- the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1 capture and hold the digital image signal supplied from the input side selector 302 in the first half of each horizontal scanning period
- the line memories 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br In the second half of the scanning period, the digital image signal supplied from the input side selector 302 is captured and held.
- FIGS. 12B and 12C show the signals on the input side and the output side when the digital image signal corresponding to the second line of the image to be displayed is input to the input side selector 302.
- the line memo U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br is the image to be displayed Holds the digital image signal corresponding to the first line.
- “X” indicates an invalid or indefinite signal value.
- the digital image signals xRy—L, xGy_L, and xBy—L representing the left image are line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, and the right image, each of which is ij pixel-powered.
- Digital image signals xRy— R, xGy_R, xBy— R are serially input in units of subpixels, and line memories 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br output these image signals in parallel for each row of the image to be displayed. To do.
- the three line memories 304R1, 304G1, and 304B1 input digital image signals representing the left image serially in units of pixels and correspond to one row of the left image.
- the other three line memories 304Rr, 304 Gr, and 304Br function as the first series-parallel variable ⁇ output to the parallel, and input the digital image signal representing the right image serially in pixel units. It functions as the second series-parallel variation that outputs the image one line at a time in parallel.
- the latch circuit 306 receives one line of digital image signals output from the line memory 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br force to the NORENORE. Based on the latch strobe signal LS shown in 12 (D), the digital image signal for one row is output as shown in FIGS. 12 (E) and 12 (F).
- the output side selector 308, the DZ A conversion circuit 310, and the output buffer 312 operate in the same manner as in the two-system simultaneous input mode described above (see FIG. 11), and the same data signal D (1) to D (2n) is output from the data driver 300.
- the data signal line Ls connected to the sub-pixel forming portion where each pixel of the left image is to be formed is time-divided into the same pixel signal group xRy—L, xGy_L, xBy—L.
- the data signal is applied to the data signal line Ls connected to the sub-pixel forming part where each pixel of the right image is to be formed, and the data signal is applied to the same pixel signal group xRy—R, xGy_R, xBy—R in a time division manner.
- the horizontal pixel arrangement configuration is higher than the conventional vertical pixel arrangement configuration and can prevent the left and right images from being reflected without requiring processing accuracy.
- the number of scanning signal lines is three times as many as the number of display rows.
- the conventional vertical pixel arrangement configuration (Fig. 30) is required.
- the number of scanning signal lines Lg is three times as large as that of the liquid crystal panel 600.
- the three sub-pixel forming portions are connected to the same data signal line Ls (FIG. 1).
- a data signal is applied to the data signal line Ls connected to the sub-pixel forming portion that should form each pixel of the left image in a time division manner for the same pixel signal group xRy—L, xGy_L, xBy—L.
- the input data format is the DV2 system simultaneous input format (FIG. 5 (A)) and the DV display.
- the DV display LCD panel 600 (with a horizontal pixel arrangement with a reduced number of data signal lines to suppress a decrease in aperture ratio) Data signal line Ls) can be driven.
- the output-side selector 308 for time-division output for the same pixel signal group is arranged in front of the DZA conversion circuit 310.
- the output-side selector The 308b may be constituted by an analog switch or the like, and may be arranged at the subsequent stage of the DZA conversion circuit 310 as shown in FIG.
- the configuration in which the output side selector 308 is arranged in front of the DZA conversion circuit 310 has the advantage that the scale of the DZA conversion circuit can be reduced.
- the block has only one terminal that outputs a signal Y selected from the same pixel signal group A2, B2, and C2. Instead, the block has an output selector 308 as shown in FIG. Each block may output three signals Yl, Y2, Y3 from three output terminals. In this case, as shown in Fig. 16 (F) and Fig. 16 (G), the three signals Yl, Y2, Y3 from the three output terminals of each block in the output side selector 308 are the same signal.
- the three output terminals in the data driver 300 correspond to one data signal line Ls in the liquid crystal panel 600, and the three signals Rj, Gj, Bj as the data signal D (j) are substantially the same signal. It is. Therefore, the three output terminals from which the signals Rj, Gj, and Bj are output are connected to one data signal line (jth data signal line) Ls in the liquid crystal panel 600. As a result, it is possible to improve reliability by providing redundancy in the connection between the data signal line Ls and the data driver 300 in the liquid crystal panel 600.
- the input side selector 302 is connected to the first output terminal group 1Y1 to: LY3 and the second output terminal group 1Y4 to which the digital image signals input from the first input terminal groups A1 to C1 are to be output.
- the data driver 300 can also be used as a data driver in a normal SV liquid crystal display device with a vertically long pixel arrangement (in this case, input The second input terminal group D1 to F1 of the side selector 302 is not used).
- a configuration in which the parallax barrier layer 54 as a parallax generation unit is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal panel 600, that is, a front parallax barrier method is adopted (FIG. 3).
- a rear parallax barrier method (see, for example, FIG. 4 of Patent Document 1) may be employed.
- the liquid crystal display device is a so-called driver (full) monolithic type or partial driver monolithic type in which all or part of various drive circuits and the like are integrally formed on a glass substrate together with a pixel circuit. It may be a liquid crystal display device. Also, above In the embodiment, the liquid crystal panel in which the pixel electrode and the counter electrode are formed on different substrates has been described as an example. However, these electrode structures are not limited to the same substrate, for example, the IPS On Plane Switching) method. Further, a pixel electrode and a counter electrode may be formed. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but can be applied to an active matrix type DV display device other than a liquid crystal display device.
- a DV display device that displays different images for two users is taken as an example, but binocular parallax is given to one user based on the same principle.
- the present invention is also applicable to a display device that generates a three-dimensional display by generating the above.
- a display device other than a DV display device when a pixel of a color image is formed by an R subpixel, a G subpixel, and a B subpixel which are in a horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration and are adjacent in the column direction. If so, the present invention can be applied.
- the data driver according to this embodiment can be used not only for driving a liquid crystal panel of a DV liquid crystal display device (hereinafter referred to as “DV liquid crystal panel”), but also for an SV liquid crystal display device. It can also be used to drive a liquid crystal panel (hereinafter referred to as “SV liquid crystal panel”).
- the expressions “left image” and “right image” are the two images that should be displayed on the DV liquid crystal display panel when driving the DV liquid crystal panel, as in the first embodiment. Means.
- the expressions “two-line simultaneous input mode” and “display mapping input mode” are also used in the same meaning as in the first embodiment, and the SV LCD panel is driven.
- the operation mode when the data driver receives the image signal in the input format is called ⁇ normal display mode '' .
- ⁇ normal display mode '' the operation mode when the data driver receives the image signal in the input format (general input format for normal display, not DV display)
- ⁇ normal display mode '' the operation mode when the data driver receives the image signal in the input format
- ⁇ normal display mode '' the operation mode when the data driver receives the image signal in the input format
- ⁇ normal display mode '' the operation mode when the data driver receives the image signal in the input format
- ⁇ normal display mode '' the operation mode when the data driver receive
- FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the data driver according to this embodiment.
- This data driver is basically the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 14 as the configuration example of the data driver 300 in the first embodiment, and therefore, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same or corresponding parts.
- other components and signals in the liquid crystal display device to which the data driver according to the present embodiment should be used are also referred to as “display control circuit 200” or “digital image signal DV1 or DV2,” for example.
- display control circuit 200 or “digital image signal DV1 or DV2,” for example.
- the data driver includes an input-side selector 302 as a first connection switching circuit and six line memories functioning as a series-parallel shift, that is, a left image red line.
- a latch circuit 306 as a holding means for holding a signal indicating sub-pixel data, an output side selector 308 as a second connection switching circuit, an eight-eight conversion circuit 310, and an output buffer 312 are provided. .
- the digital image signal DV1 representing the left image is a red input signal R-Lin for the left image, a green input signal G-Lin, and a blue input signal B-Lin
- the digital image signal DV1 representing the right image is
- the red input signal R—Rin, green input signal G—Rin, and blue input signal B—Rin of the right image are input from the display control circuit 200 to the input side selector 302, respectively.
- the input side selection control signals SI and S2 are given from the display control circuit 200 to the input side selector 302 as control signals for selecting the input format, and control for enabling time-division switching of the output signals is possible.
- Output side selection control signals S3 and S4 are given from the display control circuit 200 to the output side selector 308 as signals. Further, the latch strobe signal LS is supplied from the display control circuit 200 to the latch circuit 306, and a plurality of reference voltages (not shown) are supplied to the DZA conversion circuit 310.
- the input side selection control signals SI and S2 are also provided with the above line memos U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br, and also serve as enable signals for these line memories.
- the input-side selector 302 is a first input for inputting the input signals R—Lin, G—Lin, and B—Lin that constitute the digital image signal DV1 representing the left image.
- Terminal group Al, Bl, CI and second input terminal group Dl, El, F for inputting the input signals R — Rin, G— Rin, B— Rin that constitute the digital image signal DV2 representing the right image, respectively 1 and the first output terminal group 1Y1, 1Y2, 1Y3 for outputting image signals to the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1 for the left image and the line memories 304Rr, 30 4Gr, 304Br for the right image, respectively.
- a second output terminal group 1Y4, 1Y5, 1Y6 for outputting image signals is provided.
- FIG. 18A shows a truth table showing the operation of the input side selector 302.
- the input side selector 302 receives the second image signals given to the first input terminal groups A1 to C1, respectively. Output terminal group 1Y4 to 1Y6, and the second input terminal group D1 to F1 are not used.
- “X” indicates that the output signal is indefinite or invalid.
- the input-side selector 302 receives a signal representing the left image and the right image in a DV2 system simultaneous input format (see FIG. 30).
- the input side selection control signals SI and S2 shown in Fig. 19 (B) are given, and the signals representing the left and right images are displayed in DV display mapping format.
- input side selection control signals SI and S2 shown in Fig. 19 (C) are given.
- the input side selection control signals SI and S2 shown in FIG. 19D are given.
- the input side selection control signals SI and S2 shown in Fig. 19 (E) are given.
- the output side selector 308 also has 2n blocking power (2n is the number of data signal lines Ls), and each block has three input terminals and three output terminals. Each block receives the digital signals A2, B2, and C2 corresponding to the three subpixel data, and the true signals shown in FIG. According to the reasoning table, select the medium power of the signals A2, B2, and C2 for the signals to be output from the three output terminals, and output the three output terminal forces as digital signals Yl, Y2, and Y3. .
- the output side selector 308 When driving a liquid crystal panel with a vertically long pixel arrangement (whether to drive either a DV liquid crystal panel or an SV liquid crystal panel), the output side selector 308 includes the output side selector 308 shown in FIGS. ), The output side selection control signals S3 and S4 shown in Fig. 20 (B) are given so that the three signals Yl, Y2 and Y3 are output independently from each block.
- the operation mode in which three signals Yl, Y2, and Y3 are output independently for each block force is called “independent output mode”).
- the output side selector 308 is shown in FIGS. 21 (C) to 21 (E).
- the signals Yl, Y2, Y3 output from each block are the same and can be switched sequentially between the three signals A2, B2, C2, that is, the three signals A2, B2, C2
- Output side selection control signals S3 and S4 shown in Fig. 21 (B) are given so that the signals are output in a time-sharing manner within one horizontal scanning period (hereinafter, signals Yl output from each block in this way).
- signals Y2 and Y3 are the same, and the operation mode that can be switched sequentially between the above three signals A2, B2, and C2 is called “time division output mode”.
- each of the three signals Rj, Bj, Gj is output as the same data signal D (j), and each data signal D (j) is the above three signals.
- This signal corresponds to the time-division output of A2, B2, and C2.
- the output side selection control signals S3 and S4 are switched every 1Z3 period of each horizontal scanning period as shown in FIG. 21B, and the timing of the switching is the scanning signal line Lg by the gate driver 400. Is synchronized with the selection.
- connection by signal wiring between the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br and the latch circuit 30 6 is as follows. It is different from the embodiment. That is, in this embodiment, a sub-pixel forming unit (any one of the R sub-pixel, G sub-pixel, and B sub-pixel) that forms the left image pixel corresponding to the vertically long pixel arrangement configuration shown in FIG. 30 in the DV liquid crystal panel.
- Signal corresponding to the data to be captured (X Ry_L, xGy_L, xBy—
- the input-side selector 302 is provided with the input-side selection control signals SI and S2 shown in FIG. 22 (A), and two digital image signals DV1 and DV2 representing the left image and the right image are shown in FIG.
- Digital image signals R-Lin, G-Lin, B-Lin, R_Rin, G-Rin, B-Rin shown in (B) are serially input in units of sub-pixels.
- the input side selector 302 receives the control signal and the image signal as shown in FIG.
- the digital image signal R—Lin, G—Lin, B—Lin, R—Rin, G — Rin, B— Rin is output terminal group 1Y1 ⁇ : LY6 force is also output and supplied to line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br, respectively.
- 22B and 22C show the input side when the digital image signal corresponding to the second line of the image to be displayed (the left image and the right image) is input to the input side selector 302.
- the line memo U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br holds the digital image signal corresponding to the first line of the image to be displayed. .
- the line memos U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br are digital image signals R-Lin, G-Lin, B_Lin, R- Rin, G—Rin, B—Rin are output in parallel for each line of the image to be displayed. That is, the three line memories 304R1, 304G1, and 304B1 function as a first serial / parallel converter that serially inputs a digital image signal representing the left image in units of pixels and outputs the left image in parallel for each row.
- the other three line memories 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304 Br input the digital image signal representing the right image serially in pixel units and output the right image in parallel for each row of the right image.
- the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br and the latch circuit 306 are connected as shown in FIG. 17 as described above. For this reason, the latch circuit 306 receives the digital image signals for one line of the left image and the right image output from the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br force to the NORENORE, and FIG. Latch strobe signal LS shown in Fig. 22 (E) and Fig. 22 (F). To) alternately. 22E and 22F show digital image signals to be input from the latch circuit 306 to the blocks I and II of the output side selector 308, respectively. In this way, the latch circuit 306 holds the three digital image signals to be input to each block of the output side selector 308 for one horizontal scanning period and outputs them as signals A2, B2, and C2.
- the output side selector 308 receives the digital image signal for one row of the left and right images from the latch circuit 306 as described above (FIGS. 23D and 23E) and FIG. Output side selection control signals S3 and S4 shown in (C) are given.
- the signals A2, B2, and C2 input to the respective blocks of the latch circuit 306 are output as signals Yl, Y2, and Y3 as they are and input to the D ZA conversion circuit 310.
- the input-side selector 302 is provided with the input-side selection control signals SI and S2 shown in FIG. 24 (A), and the left image data DaL and the right image data DaR as shown in FIG. 5 (B).
- One system of digital image signals DV corresponding to combined image data arranged in the row direction is converted into digital image signals R-Lin, G-Lin, B-Lin shown in Fig. 24 (B). , Input serially from C1 in sub-pixel units.
- the input-side selector 302 in the first half of each horizontal scanning period, digital image signals xR y_L, xGy_L, xBy— L is output from the first output terminal group 1Y1 ⁇ : LY3 is supplied to the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, respectively, and in the second half of each horizontal scanning period, digital image signals representing the right image xRy—R, xGy_R, xBy—R are output from the second output terminal group 1 Y4 ⁇ : LY6, respectively, and supplied to the line memories 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br.
- the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1 capture and hold the digital image signal supplied from the input side selector 302 in the first half of each horizontal scanning period
- the line memories 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br In the second half of the scanning period, the digital image signal supplied from the input side selector 302 is captured and held.
- FIGS. 24B and 24C show the signals on the input side and the output side when the digital image signal corresponding to the second line of the image to be displayed is input to the input side selector 302.
- the line memos U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br hold the digital image signal corresponding to the first line of the image to be displayed.
- “X” indicates an invalid or indefinite signal value (the same applies to the other figures mentioned below).
- the digital image signals xRy—L, xGy_L, and xBy—L representing the left image are line memory 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, and the right image, each of which is manually input to cylinole in ij pixels.
- Digital image signals xRy—R, xGy_R, xBy—R The line memories 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br that are serially input in order output those image signals in parallel for each line of the left and right images to be displayed.
- the three line memories 304R1, 304G1, and 304B1 input digital image signals representing the left image serially in units of pixels, and one line for the left image.
- the other three line memories 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br function as the first series-parallel variable to be output to the normal, and digital image signals representing the right image are serially input in units of pixels to output the right image. It functions as a second series-parallel variable that outputs in parallel one line at a time.
- the latch circuit 306 receives the digital image signal for one line of the left and right images output to the NORENORE from the line memo U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br force, Latching is performed based on the latch strobe signal LS shown in FIG. 24 (D), and the digital image signal for one row is output as shown in FIGS. 24 (E) and 24 (F).
- the output side selector 308, the DZ A conversion circuit 310, and the output buffer 312 operate in the same manner as in the two-system simultaneous input mode described above (see FIG. 23), and the image signal power for one line of the left and right images
- the input-side selector 302 is provided with the input-side selection control signals SI and S2 shown in FIG. 25A, and two digital image signals DV1 and DV2 representing the left image and the right image are shown in FIG.
- Digital image signals R-Lin, G-Lin, B-Lin, R_Rin, G-Rin, B-Rin shown in (B) are serially input in units of sub-pixels.
- the input-side selector 302 receives the control signal and the image signal as shown in FIG.
- 25 (C) according to the truth table shown in FIG. 18 (A).
- B_L in, R Rin, G Rin, B Rin are output from the output terminal groups 1Y1 to 1Y6 respectively.
- 25 (B) and 25 (C) show the input side when the digital image signal corresponding to the second line of the image to be displayed (the left image and the right image) is input to the input side selector 302 and The signals on the output side are shown.
- the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304 Bl, 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br hold the digital image signal corresponding to the first line of the image to be displayed.
- Line memos U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br are digital image signals R-Lin, G-Lin, B_Lin, R_Rin, which are serially input in units of sub-pixels in this way.
- G_Rin, B 1 Rin is output to the parallel line for one line of the left and right image to be displayed. That is, unlike the case of driving a liquid crystal panel having a vertically long pixel arrangement, the three line memories 304G1, 304Rr, and 304Br input digital image signals representing the left image serially in units of pixels, and one line of the left image.
- the other three line memories 304R1, 304B1, and 304Gr function as the first serial-to-parallel variation that outputs the data in parallel, and input the digital image signal representing the right image serially in units of pixels. It functions as the second series-parallel transformation that outputs to the normal by one line.
- the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br and the latch circuit 306 are connected as shown in FIG. 17 as described above.
- the latch circuit 306 receives the digital image signals for one row of the left image and the right image output from the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br force to the NORENORE, and FIG. Is latched based on the latch strobe signal LS shown in FIG. 25, and the digital image signals for the corresponding one row of the left image and the right image are output as shown in FIGS. 25 (E) and 25 (F).
- the signals xRy—R, xGy_R, and xBy—R corresponding to the data to be taken in by the three subpixel forming sections (R subpixel, G subpixel, and B subpixel) that form the pixel are on the output side of the latch circuit 306. They will be lined up alternately. In each block, the latch circuit 306 holds such a digital image signal for one horizontal scanning period and outputs it as signals A2, B2, and C2.
- the digital image signal for the above-mentioned one row of the left and right images is input from the latch circuit 306 to the output side selector 308 (FIGS. 16D and 16E) and FIG. 21B.
- Output side selection control signals S3 and S4 shown in Fig. 6 are given.
- the values of the output side selection control signals S3 and S4 (a combination of the value of the signal S3 and the value of the signal S4) are switched every 1Z3 horizontal scanning period in each horizontal scanning period.
- the output-side selector 308 has three sub-pixel forming portions (R sub-pixel, G sub-pixel, and B sub-pixel) that form each pixel in one row of the image to be displayed (left image and right image).
- the output side selection control signals S3 and S4 are switched in synchronization with the selection of the scanning signal line Lg by the gate driver 400.
- the signal output from the output side selector 308 in this way is converted into an analog voltage signal by the DZA conversion circuit.
- the analog voltage signal thus obtained is output from the data driver as data signals 0 (1) to 0 (211) for one row of the left and right images via the output buffer 312. That is, each of the three signals Rj, Bj, Gj is output from the data driver as the same data signal D (j), and each data signal D (j) is the above three signals A2, B2, C2 (same pixel signal) Group)). Therefore, the DV liquid crystal panel can be driven by applying such a data signal to a data signal line of a DV liquid crystal panel (FIGS. 1 and 4) having a horizontally long pixel arrangement.
- the input-side selector 302 is provided with the input-side selection control signals SI and S2 shown in FIG. 26 (B), and the left image data DaL and the right image data DaR as shown in FIG. 5 (B).
- One digital image signal DV is serially input in units of subpixels from the input terminal group Al, Bl, C1 as digital image signals R-Lin, G-Lin, B-Lin shown in Fig. 26 (B) .
- the input-side selector 302 receives the control signal and the image signal in accordance with the truth table of FIG. 18A, and in the first half of each horizontal scanning period, Digital image signals xRy— L, xGy_L, xBy—L representing the left image are respectively output from the output terminal groups 1Y2, 1Y4, 1Y6 and supplied to the line memories 304G1, 304Rr, 304Br, respectively, and the latter half of each horizontal scanning period.
- digital image signals xRy—R, xGy_R, and xBy—R representing the right image are output from the output terminal groups 1Y1, 1Y3, and 1Y5, respectively, and supplied to the line memories 304R1, 304B1, and 304Gd, respectively.
- the line memories 304G1, 304Rr, 304Br capture and hold the digital image signal supplied from the input side selector 302 in the first half of each horizontal scanning period
- the line memories 304R1, 304B1, 304Gr In the second half of the horizontal scanning period, the digital image signal supplied from the input side selector 302 is captured and held.
- 26B and 26C show the signals on the input side and the output side when the digital image signal corresponding to the second line of the image to be displayed is input to the input side selector 302.
- the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br hold digital image signals corresponding to the first line of the image to be displayed.
- the digital image signals xRy—L, xGy_L, and xBy—L representing the left image are represented by line memories 304G1, 304Rr, 304B, and the right image, each of which is manually input to ij pixels.
- Line memory 304R1, 304B1, and 304Gr that input digital image signals xRy—R, xGy_R, and xBy—R serially in units of sub-pixels in parallel for each row of left and right images to be displayed.
- the three line memories 304G1, 304Rr, and 304Br serialize the digital image signal representing the left image in units of pixels.
- the other three line memories 304R1, 304B1, and 304Gr use the digital image signal that represents the right image as a pixel. It functions as a second serial-to-parallel converter that inputs serially in units and outputs in parallel each row of the right image. Therefore, this display mapping input mode [Even if this is the case, the latch circuit 306, or the line memory 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br digital image signal for one row of left and right images output in parallel. Is received and latched based on the latch strobe signal LS shown in FIG. 26 (D), and the digital image signal for one row is output as shown in FIGS. 26 (E) and 26 (F). .
- the output side selector 308 receives a digital image signal for one row of the left and right images from the latch circuit 306 as described above (FIGS. 16D and 16E), and FIG. Output side selection control signals S3 and S4 shown in (B) are given. Therefore, the output-side selector 308 performs one horizontal scanning as shown in FIGS. 16 (F) and 16 (G) in the same manner as in operation example 3 above. Output as signals Yl, Y2, Y3 in time division (1H period). However, these signals Yl, Y2, Y3 are the same signal.
- the signal output from the output side selector 308 in this way is converted into an analog voltage signal by the DZA conversion circuit, and these analog voltage signals are passed through the output buffer 312 to one line of the left and right images.
- Minute data signals D (l) to D (2n) are output from the data driver. That is, each of the three signals Rj, Bj, Gj is output as the same data signal D (j) as a data driver, and each data signal D (j) is output from the above three signals A2, B2, C2 (same pixel signal). Group)). Therefore, the DV liquid crystal panel can be driven by applying such a data signal to the data signal line of the DV liquid crystal panel (FIGS. 1 and 4) having a horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration.
- the input-side selector 302 is provided with the input-side selection control signals S1 and S2 shown in FIG. 27 (A), and one digital image signal shown in FIG. , Serially input from C1 in sub-pixel units. At this time, a signal equivalent to one pixel.
- the input side selection control signals SI, S2 (combination of the value of signal SI and the value of signal S2) are switched.
- the input-side selector 302 receives odd numbers in these horizontal scanning periods as shown in FIG. 27 (C) according to the truth table of FIG. 18 (A).
- Signals xRy, xGy, xBy (y is an odd number) corresponding to the eye pixel are respectively output from the output terminal groups 1Y2, 1Y4, 1Y6 and supplied to the line memories 304G1, 304Rr, 304Br, respectively.
- the signals xRy, xGy, and xBy (y is an even number) corresponding to are output from the output terminal groups 1Y1, 1Y3, and 1Y5, and supplied to the line memories 304R1, 304B1, and 304Gr, respectively.
- the line memories 304G1, 304Rr, and 304Br capture and hold the digital image signal supplied from the input-side selector 302 during the period corresponding to the odd-numbered pixels in each horizontal scanning period.
- 304R1, 304B1, and 304Gr capture and hold a digital image signal supplied from the input-side selector 302 in a period corresponding to an even-numbered pixel in each horizontal scanning period.
- FIGS. 27B and 27C show the signals on the input side and the output side when the digital image signal corresponding to the second line of the image to be displayed is input to the input-side selector 302.
- the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br hold the digital image signal corresponding to the first line of the display smooth image.
- the line memories 304G1, 304Rr in which the image signals xRy, xGy, xBy (y is an odd number) corresponding to the odd-numbered pixels in each row of the image to be displayed are serially input in units of sub-pixels.
- the line memories 304R1, 304B1, and 304Gr that serially input 304B and image signals xRy, xGy, and xBy (y is an even number) corresponding to even-numbered pixels in each row of the image to be displayed These image signals are output in parallel for each line of the image to be displayed.
- the three line memories 304G1, 304Rr, and 304Br input digital image signals representing the odd-numbered pixels in each row of the image to be displayed serially in units of pixels, and apply them to the odd-numbered pixels in one row of the image.
- the other three line memories 304R1, 304B1, and 304Gr function as the first series-parallel variable ⁇ that outputs the corresponding amount in parallel, and represent the even-numbered pixels in each row of the image to be displayed.
- the image signal is input serially in pixel units, and the even-numbered image in one row of the image is displayed. It functions as a second serial-to-parallel converter that outputs in parallel the amount corresponding to the element.
- the latch circuit 306 receives a digital image signal for one line in which the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304 Gr, and 304Br are also output in parallel.
- the latch strobe signal shown in FIG. Latching is performed based on LS, and the digital image signal for one row is output as shown in FIGS. 27 (E) and 27 (F).
- a digital image signal for one row of the above image is input to the output-side selector 308 from the latch circuit 306 (FIGS. 28D and 28E), as shown in FIG.
- Output side selection control signals S3 and S4 are provided. Accordingly, the output side selector 308 outputs signals Yl, Y2, Y3 as shown in FIGS. 28 (F) and 28 (G) from each block.
- the signal output from the output-side selector 308 in this way is converted into an analog voltage signal by the DZA conversion circuit, and these analog voltage signals are output to the image to be displayed via the output buffer 312.
- the input-side selector 302 is provided with the input-side selection control signals S1 and S2 shown in FIG. 27 (A), and one digital image signal shown in FIG. , Serially input from C1 in sub-pixel units. Therefore, in this case, as in the above operation example 5, the latch circuit 306 receives the signals to be input to each block of the output side selector 308 as shown in FIG. 29 (D) and FIG. 29 (E) (FIG. 27 (E) And digital image signals A2, B2, C2 as shown in Fig. 27 (F)) are output.
- the digital image signals A2, B2, and C2 are input to each block of the output side selector 308 (FIGS. 29D and 29E), and the output side shown in FIG. 29C.
- Selection control signals S3 and S4 are provided.
- the values of the output side selection control signals S3 and S4 (the combination of the signal S3 value and the signal S4 value) are switched every 1Z3 horizontal scanning period in each horizontal scanning period.
- each block of the output-side selector 308 should take in three subpixel forming portions (R subpixel, G subpixel, and B subpixel) that form each pixel in one row of the image to be displayed.
- the same pixel signal group xRy, xGy, xBy corresponding to the data is sequentially output every 1/3 horizontal scanning period. That is, the signals constituting the same pixel signal group are output as signals Yl, Y2, Y3 by time division in one horizontal scanning period as shown in FIGS. 29 (F) and 29 (G). However, these signals Yl, Y2, Y3 are the same signal.
- the signal output from the output-side selector 308 in this way is converted into an analog voltage signal by the DZA conversion circuit, and these analog voltage signals are output via the output buffer 312 to the image to be displayed.
- One row of data signals D (1) to D (2n) are output from the data driver. That is, each of the three signals Rj, Bj, Gj is output from the data driver as the same data signal D (j), and each data signal D (j) is the above three signals A2, B2, C2 (same pixel signal) Group)). Therefore, the DV liquid crystal panel can be driven by applying such a data signal to the data signal line of the SV liquid crystal panel having the horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration.
- the three line memories corresponding to the three primary colors of the color image display are set as one set, and the left and right sides are compatible with the DV liquid crystal panel.
- Two sets of line memories (total of 6 line memories) 304Rl to 304Br that can be associated with images are provided, and each of the 6 line memories 304R1 to 304Br represents an image to be displayed. It functions as a series-parallel transformation that inputs image data in units of subpixels and outputs them in parallel.
- a digital image signal serially given to the data driver as image data (display data) representing an image to be displayed is a signal line connection between the six line memories 304Rl to 304Br and the latch circuit 306.
- the output signals A2, B2, and C2 from the latch circuit 30 6 are the pixel arrangement configuration of the liquid crystal panel to be driven (vertical image).
- Data signal format (independent output format or time-division output format) output from the data dryer by switching the output-side selection control signals S3 and S4 according to the basic configuration or horizontal pixel configuration) Can be changed by the output side selector 308 (see Fig. 18 (B) ⁇ Fig. 20, Fig. 21).
- an output format corresponding to various liquid crystal panels such as a DV liquid crystal panel or an SV liquid crystal panel having a vertically long pixel arrangement structure or a horizontally long pixel arrangement structure without separately preparing an interface circuit.
- the drive signal (data signal) can be output with the same, and the input format of the image signal representing the image to be displayed is the same as the DV2 simultaneous input format, DV display mapping input format, and normal display input format. Either can be supported.
- the configuration shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 for the second embodiment is an example, and even if the input format or output format that can be supported is more limited than the above embodiment, the input format or output format is not limited. If the degree of freedom can be secured within the required range for each type, For example, while ensuring flexibility in the input format (providing a connection switching circuit such as the input side selector 302), the liquid crystal panel to be driven is limited to a DV liquid crystal panel having a horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration. Also good. This reduces the degree of freedom with respect to the compatible input / output formats, but simplifies the configuration of the data driver (for example, the configuration of the output side selector 308 to the output buffer 312 shown in FIG. 6).
- the input formats that can be supported are fixed, and for the liquid crystal panel to be driven, either the vertical pixel arrangement configuration or the horizontal pixel arrangement configuration (independent output format or time division output format)
- a connection switching circuit such as the output side selector 308 may be provided only on the output side so that it can be supported.
- the data driver of the liquid crystal panel has been described as an example.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and the display panel in a matrix type display device other than the liquid crystal display device is not limited thereto.
- the present invention is also applicable to the data side driving circuit.
- the present invention relates to a matrix display device such as an active matrix liquid crystal display device.
- a matrix display device such as an active matrix liquid crystal display device.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
- Control Of Indicators Other Than Cathode Ray Tubes (AREA)
Abstract
To allow the input and/or output format of a data side driving circuit of a matrix type display apparatus to have a flexibility. A data driver has two sets of line memories (340RI-340Br) corresponding to respective dissymmetry images to be displayed on a DV liquid crystal panel, each set comprising three line memories corresponding to the three primary colors of color display. These line memories serve as a serial/parallel converter for data side driving of the liquid crystal panel. An image signal to be applied to the data driver is supplied to any one of the six line memories in accordance with the input format of an input side selector (302). An output side selector (308) is used to switch the selections of output signals (A2,B2,C2) to be outputted from a latch circuit (306) via the foregoing line memories, thereby changing the output formats of the data driver in accordance with a pixel arrangement of the liquid crystal panel. The present invention is applicable to the data side driving circuits of various types of display apparatuses having different pixel arrangements.
Description
明 細 書 Specification
表示装置の駆動回路および駆動方法 Display device drive circuit and drive method
技術分野 Technical field
[0001] 本発明は、アクティブマトリクス型液晶表示装置等のようなマトリクス型表示装置に 関するものであり、更に詳しくは、そのような表示装置におけるデータ信号線を駆動 するための駆動回路に関する。 The present invention relates to a matrix display device such as an active matrix liquid crystal display device, and more particularly to a drive circuit for driving data signal lines in such a display device.
背景技術 Background art
[0002] 近年、使用者に両眼視差を生じさせて立体的な表示を行う液晶表示装置が提供さ れている。この液晶表示装置では、液晶パネルに視差バリアを設けることによって、 左右の目に相当する 2つの視点に対して異なる画像を表示する構成となっている。こ れと同様の原理により、 2人の使用者に対して異なる画像を表示する液晶表示装置( 以下「デュアルビュー液晶表示装置」または「DV液晶表示装置」 t 、う)を実現するこ とができる(例えば下記の特許文献 1参照)。この DV液晶表示装置では、例えば、右 側から見える表示画像と左側力 見える表示画像とを異ならせることができる。したが つて、この DV液晶表示装置を例えば車に搭載して運転者と助手席の搭乗者とに異 なる画像を表示したり、銀行等の窓口に設置して客と係員とに異なる画像を表示した りすることが可能となる。 [0002] In recent years, liquid crystal display devices that provide stereoscopic display by causing binocular parallax to a user have been provided. In this liquid crystal display device, a parallax barrier is provided on the liquid crystal panel to display different images for two viewpoints corresponding to the left and right eyes. Based on the same principle, it is possible to realize a liquid crystal display device (hereinafter referred to as “dual view liquid crystal display device” or “DV liquid crystal display device”) that displays different images for two users. (For example, see Patent Document 1 below). In this DV liquid crystal display device, for example, a display image seen from the right side and a display image seen from the left side can be made different. Therefore, for example, this DV liquid crystal display device can be installed in a car to display different images for the driver and passengers in the passenger seat, or installed at a counter such as a bank to display different images for customers and staff. It can be displayed.
[0003] 以下、このような DV液晶表示装置の原理につき図面を参照して説明する。図 30 ( A)は、 DV液晶表示装置において表示すべき画像の画素を形成する画素形成部の 配置 (以下「画素配置」という)を模式的に示す平面図であり、図 30 (B)は、その画素 配置を模式的に示す断面図である(図 30 (A)は、図 30 (B)の Y—Y線における断面 図である)。 Hereinafter, the principle of such a DV liquid crystal display device will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 30 (A) is a plan view schematically showing the arrangement of the pixel formation portions (hereinafter referred to as “pixel arrangement”) for forming the pixels of the image to be displayed in the DV liquid crystal display device, and FIG. FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the pixel arrangement (FIG. 30A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line YY in FIG. 30B).
[0004] 一般に、カラー画像を表示する液晶表示装置では、表示すべき画像を構成する各 画素は、 R (赤)の副画素と G (緑)の副画素と B (青)の副画素からなり、これに対応し て、各画素に対し、 R (赤)の画素形成部(「R副画素」ともいう)と、 G (緑)の画素形成 部(「G副画素」とも 、う)と、 B (青)の画素形成部(「B副画素」とも 、う)とが設けられて いる。図 30 (A)に示すように、 DV液晶表示装置では、マトリクス状に配置された多数
の画素形成部力 なる画素アレイは、 R副画素が並ぶ列、 G副画素が並ぶ列、およ び B副画素が並ぶ列を有しており、 1列おきに配置された R副画素と G副画素と B副 画素とからなる 3つの副画素によって、表示すべき画像 (DV液晶表示装置では表示 すべき画像は 2つあり、そのうちの一方の画像)における 1つの画素が形成される。 In general, in a liquid crystal display device that displays a color image, each pixel constituting an image to be displayed is composed of an R (red) subpixel, a G (green) subpixel, and a B (blue) subpixel. Correspondingly, for each pixel, an R (red) pixel forming portion (also referred to as “R subpixel”) and a G (green) pixel forming portion (also referred to as “G subpixel”). And a B (blue) pixel formation portion (also referred to as “B sub-pixel”). As shown in Fig. 30 (A), the DV liquid crystal display device has a large number of elements arranged in a matrix. The pixel array, which has a pixel forming power, includes a column in which R subpixels are arranged, a column in which G subpixels are arranged, and a row in which B subpixels are arranged, and R subpixels arranged every other column and Three subpixels consisting of the G subpixel and the B subpixel form one pixel in the image to be displayed (the DV liquid crystal display device has two images to be displayed and one of them).
[0005] この DV液晶表示装置では、視差バリア 84bが図 30 (B)に示すように配置されるこ とにより、各副画素 90から出射される光が選択的に遮断され、各副画素 90から出射 される光のうち当該 DV液晶表示装置から出ていく光は、視差バリア 84bに形成され たスリット 84sを通過する光だけである。すなわち、図 30 (B)において Θ bおよび Θ g で示されるような範囲にのみ光が出射される。その結果、図 30 (B)において、当該 D V液晶表示装置の表示面前方における左側に位置する使用者には、図に示した 4個 の副画素のうち左から 3つ目の B副画素が見えるが、左から 2番目の G副画素は見え ない。これに対し、当該 DV液晶表示装置の表示面前方における右側に位置する使 用者には、図に示した 4個の副画素のうち左から 2つ目の G副画素が見える力 左か ら 3番目の B副画素は見えない。したがって、 DV液晶表示装置においてマトリクス状 に配置された副画素のうち、 1列おきに選ばれた副画素からなる第 1の副画素群は、 上記左側に位置する使用者 (視点)に対して表示する画像を形成し、当該第 1の副 画素群以外の副画素力 なる第 2の画素群 (これも 1列おきに選ばれた画素力 なる )は、上記右側に位置する使用者 (視点)に対して表示する画像を形成する。すなわ ち、 DV液晶表示装置では、左側から見たときの表示画像と右側から見たときに表示 画像とが異なることになる。このような技術を含む本願発明に関連する技術が記載さ れた文献を以下に列記する。 In this DV liquid crystal display device, by disposing the parallax barrier 84b as shown in FIG. 30B, the light emitted from each sub-pixel 90 is selectively blocked, and each sub-pixel 90 Of the light emitted from the DV liquid crystal display device, only the light that passes through the slit 84s formed in the parallax barrier 84b is emitted from the DV liquid crystal display device. That is, light is emitted only in the ranges indicated by Θ b and Θ g in FIG. As a result, in FIG. 30B, the user located on the left side in front of the display surface of the DV liquid crystal display device has the third B subpixel from the left among the four subpixels shown in the figure. It is visible, but the second G subpixel from the left is not visible. On the other hand, the user who is located on the right side in front of the display surface of the DV liquid crystal display device can see the second G subpixel from the left of the four subpixels shown in the figure. The third B subpixel is not visible. Therefore, among the subpixels arranged in a matrix in the DV liquid crystal display device, the first subpixel group composed of subpixels selected every other column is for the user (viewpoint) located on the left side. A second pixel group that forms an image to be displayed and has a sub-pixel power other than the first sub-pixel group (which is also a pixel power selected every other column) is a user (viewpoint) located on the right side. ) To be displayed. In other words, in a DV liquid crystal display device, the display image when viewed from the left side is different from the display image when viewed from the right side. Documents describing technologies related to the present invention including such technologies are listed below.
特許文献 1 :日本の特開 2004— 206089号公報 Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-206089
特許文献 2 :日本の特開 2004— 287406号公報 Patent Document 2: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-287406
特許文献 3 :日本の特開昭 62— 278591号公報 Patent Document 3: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 62-278591
発明の開示 Disclosure of the invention
発明が解決しょうとする課題 Problems to be solved by the invention
[0006] 上記のような DV液晶表示装置では、少なくとも 2つの異なる視点に対して異なる画 像が表示されるので、表示画面前方の複数の使用者に同一の画像を表示する通常
の表示装置(以下、これを DV表示装置と区別するために「SV表示装置」と呼ぶもの とする)とは異なる形式で、表示すべき画像を表すデータ (信号)が入力される必要が ある。 [0006] In the DV liquid crystal display device as described above, since different images are displayed for at least two different viewpoints, the same image is usually displayed to a plurality of users in front of the display screen. Data (signals) representing the image to be displayed must be input in a format different from that of the display device (hereinafter referred to as “SV display device” in order to distinguish it from the DV display device). .
[0007] また、 DV液晶表示装置等のデュアルビュー表示装置(以下「DV表示装置」と略記 する)では、視点の配置可能な 2つの領域に対してそれぞれ表示すべき 2つの画像、 典型的には、表示画面に向力つて左から見たときに表示される画像である左画像と、 右から見たときに表示される画像である右画像とを表す入力データの形式として、例 えば図 5 (A)および図 5 (B)に示すような 2種類の入力形式が考えられる。図 5 (A)に 示す入力形式は、左画像データ DaLと右画像データ DaRとが 2系統のデジタル画像 信号として同時に入力される形式である(以下、これを「DV2系統同時入力形式」ま たは単に「同時入力形式」という)。図 5 (B)に示す入力形式は、左画像データ DaLと 右画像データ DaRとを水平方向(表示行方向)に並べた形式の画像データである結 合画像データを示す 1系統の信号として入力される形式、すなわち、左画像の 1行分 のデータと右画像の 1行分のデータとが交互に入力される形式 (以下「DV表示マツピ ング入力形式」または「交互入力形式」という)である。したがって、例えば DV表示マ ッビング入力形式に対応可能な DV液晶表示装置の開発に際し、データ信号線駆動 回路 (データドライノく)として DV2系統同時入力形式のデータドライバ用 IC (Integrate d Circuit)のみが入手可能な場合には、 DV表示マッピング入力形式に対応可能と するための専用のインタフェース回路を別途用意する必要がある。 [0007] In addition, in a dual view display device (hereinafter abbreviated as "DV display device") such as a DV liquid crystal display device, two images to be displayed respectively in two regions where viewpoints can be arranged, typically Is a format of input data that represents a left image that is displayed when viewed from the left and a right image that is displayed when viewed from the right. Two types of input formats are possible as shown in Fig. 5 (A) and Fig. 5 (B). The input format shown in Fig. 5 (A) is a format in which the left image data DaL and the right image data DaR are input simultaneously as two digital image signals (hereinafter referred to as "DV2 simultaneous input format"). Is simply called "simultaneous input format"). The input format shown in Fig. 5 (B) is input as a single signal indicating combined image data, which is image data in a format in which left image data DaL and right image data DaR are arranged in the horizontal direction (display row direction). Format, that is, the data for one line of the left image and the data for one line of the right image are alternately input (hereinafter referred to as “DV display mapping input format” or “alternate input format”). is there. Therefore, for example, when developing a DV LCD that can support DV display mapping input format, only the data driver IC (Integrated circuit) for DV2 system simultaneous input format is used as the data signal line drive circuit (data dryer). If available, it is necessary to prepare a dedicated interface circuit to enable the DV display mapping input format.
[0008] ところで、図 30 (A)〜図 30 (C)に示したような構成の DV液晶表示装置では、その 表示画面を左側から見たときと右側から見たとで異なる画像を良好に表示できるか否 力 すなわち、左右両側の一方からのみ見えるべき画像が他方から見たときにも見え ると 、う現象(以下「左右画像の映り込み」 t 、う)を十分に防止できる力否かは、視差 ノリア 84bと副画素 90との位置関係に敏感に依存し、左右画像の写り込みを防止す るには、視差バリア 84bと副画素 90との間隔(ギャップ) d2を狭くしなければならない 。したがって、視差バリア 84bと副画素 90との間隔 d2を小さな値に精度よく設定する ことが必要であり、 DV液晶パネルの作製には高いカ卩ェ精度が要求される。この点に ついては、上記のような視差バリアによって両眼視差を生じさせることで立体的な表
示を行う 3D液晶表示装置についても同様である。 [0008] By the way, in the DV liquid crystal display device configured as shown in FIGS. 30A to 30C, different images are displayed well when the display screen is viewed from the left side and from the right side. In other words, if an image that should be visible only from one of the left and right sides can be seen when viewed from the other side, the ability to sufficiently prevent the phenomenon (hereinafter “reflection of left and right images” t) Depends on the positional relationship between the parallax noria 84b and the sub-pixel 90, and in order to prevent the right and left images from being reflected, the interval (gap) d2 between the parallax barrier 84b and the sub-pixel 90 must be reduced. Do not become. Accordingly, it is necessary to accurately set the distance d2 between the parallax barrier 84b and the sub-pixel 90 to a small value with high accuracy, and manufacturing the DV liquid crystal panel requires high cache accuracy. In this regard, the binocular parallax is generated by the parallax barrier as described above, so that a three-dimensional display is obtained. The same applies to the 3D liquid crystal display device that performs the display.
[0009] これに対し、図 4 (A)に示すように、水平方向(行方向)が長手方向となるように副画 素 70を配置し、カラー画像を構成する各画素を垂直方向(列方向)に隣接する R副 画素、 G副画素、 B副画素という 3つの副画素 70で形成するという構成(以下「横長画 素配置構成」という)も提案されている (例えば特許文献 1の図 7 (b)参照)。このような 構成によれば、図 4 (A)に示したように垂直方向が長手方向となるように副画素を配 置する上記構成 (以下「縦長画素配置構成」という)に比べ、視差バリア 54bと副画素 70との間隔 dlを比較的大きくすることができるので、高い加工精度を必要することな く左右画像の映り込みを防止することができる。 On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4 (A), the sub-pixel 70 is arranged so that the horizontal direction (row direction) is the longitudinal direction, and each pixel constituting the color image is arranged in the vertical direction (column A configuration (hereinafter referred to as “horizontal pixel arrangement configuration”) in which three subpixels 70, which are adjacent to each other in the direction (R), G subpixel, and B subpixel, are also proposed (for example, FIG. (See 7 (b)). According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 4A, the parallax barrier is smaller than the above configuration in which the sub-pixels are arranged so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction (hereinafter referred to as “vertically long pixel arrangement configuration”). Since the distance dl between 54b and the sub-pixel 70 can be made relatively large, reflection of the left and right images can be prevented without requiring high processing accuracy.
[0010] しかし、横長画素配置構成の DV液晶表示装置では、その画素配置構成に応じた 形式で駆動信号を出力するデータドライバが必要となり、縦長画素配置構成の DV 液晶表示装置で使用されるデータドライバをそのまま使用することはできない。一方 、横長画素配置構成に対応したデータドライバ用 ICを開発した場合には、その ICは 横長画素配置構成の DV液晶表示装置に専用のものとなり、縦長画素配置構成の D V液晶表示装置や SV液晶表示装置では使用することができない。 [0010] However, a DV liquid crystal display device having a horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration requires a data driver that outputs a drive signal in a format corresponding to the pixel arrangement configuration, and data used in a DV liquid crystal display device having a vertically long pixel arrangement configuration. The driver cannot be used as it is. On the other hand, when a data driver IC that supports a horizontally long pixel arrangement is developed, the IC is dedicated to a DV liquid crystal display with a horizontally long pixel arrangement, and a DV liquid crystal display or SV liquid crystal with a vertically long pixel arrangement. It cannot be used with display devices.
[0011] 本発明は、上記問題を解決すべくなされたものであって、マトリクス型表示装置にお ける表示データの入力形式および Zまたは駆動信号の出力形式に自由度を有する データ信号線駆動回路を提供することを目的とする。 [0011] The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problem, and is a data signal line drive circuit having flexibility in display data input format and Z or drive signal output format in a matrix display device. The purpose is to provide.
課題を解決するための手段 Means for solving the problem
[0012] 本発明の第 1の局面は、列方向に延びる複数のデータ信号線と、当該複数のデー タ信号線と交差し行方向に延びる複数の走査信号線と、当該複数のデータ信号線と 当該複数の走査信号線との交差点にそれぞれ対応してマトリクス状に配置された複 数の副画素形成部とを備え、各副画素形成部は、対応する交差点を通る走査信号 線が選択されているときに対応するデータ信号線上の信号を副画素データとして取 り込む表示装置において、表示すべき画像を表す複数のデータ信号を前記複数の データ信号線に印加するための駆動回路であって、 [0012] A first aspect of the present invention includes a plurality of data signal lines extending in the column direction, a plurality of scanning signal lines intersecting with the plurality of data signal lines and extending in the row direction, and the plurality of data signal lines. And a plurality of sub-pixel forming portions arranged in a matrix corresponding to the intersections of the plurality of scanning signal lines, and each sub-pixel forming portion selects a scanning signal line passing through the corresponding intersection. A driving circuit for applying a plurality of data signals representing an image to be displayed to the plurality of data signal lines in a display device that captures a signal on a corresponding data signal line as sub-pixel data. ,
前記画像を表す画像信号を画素単位または副画素単位のシリアル信号として受け 取るための所定数の入力端子群と、前記入力端子群から入力される画像信号を画
素単位または副画素単位のシリアル信号として出力するための所定数の出力端子群 と有し、外部力も与えられる第 1の制御信号に基づき、前記所定数の入力端子群の 各入力端子群から入力される画像信号を出力すべき出力端子群を前記所定数の出 力端子群の間で切り替えるための第 1の接続切換回路と、 A predetermined number of input terminal groups for receiving an image signal representing the image as a serial signal in units of pixels or sub-pixels, and an image signal input from the input terminal group. A predetermined number of output terminal groups for outputting as serial signals in units of units or sub-pixels, and input from each input terminal group of the predetermined number of input terminal groups based on a first control signal to which an external force is also applied. A first connection switching circuit for switching an output terminal group to output an image signal to be output among the predetermined number of output terminal groups;
前記所定数の出力端子群の各出力端子群に対応して設けられ、対応する出力端 子群から出力される画像信号をシリアル信号として入力しパラレル信号として出力す る直並列変換器と、 A serial-parallel converter that is provided corresponding to each output terminal group of the predetermined number of output terminal groups, and that inputs an image signal output from the corresponding output terminal group as a serial signal and outputs it as a parallel signal;
各直並列変 力 出力されるパラレル信号に基づき前記複数のデータ信号を生 成するデータ信号生成回路とを備えることを特徴とする。 And a data signal generation circuit for generating the plurality of data signals based on the parallel signals to be output.
[0013] 本発明の第 2の局面は、本発明の第 1の局面において、 [0013] A second aspect of the present invention is the first aspect of the present invention,
前記複数の副画素形成部は、視点の配置可能な第 1の所定領域に対して表示さ れる第 1の画像を形成するための第 1の副画素形成部群と、視点の配置可能な第 2 の所定領域に対して表示される第 2の画像を形成するための第 2の副画素形成部群 とからなり、 The plurality of sub-pixel forming units includes a first sub-pixel forming unit group for forming a first image displayed for a first predetermined region where a viewpoint can be arranged, and a first sub-pixel forming unit capable of arranging a viewpoint. A second sub-pixel forming unit group for forming a second image displayed for a predetermined area of
前記所定数の入力端子群は、前記第 1または第 2の画像を表す画像信号を受け取 るための第 1の入力端子群と、前記第 2の画像を表す画像信号を受け取るための第 2 の入力端子群とを含み、 The predetermined number of input terminal groups includes a first input terminal group for receiving an image signal representing the first or second image, and a second input terminal for receiving the image signal representing the second image. Input terminal group,
前記所定数の出力端子群は、前記第 1の入力端子群から入力される画像信号を出 力するための第 1の出力端子群と、前記第 1または第 2の入力端子群から入力される 画像信号を出力するための第 2の出力端子群とを含み、 The predetermined number of output terminal groups are input from a first output terminal group for outputting an image signal input from the first input terminal group and from the first or second input terminal group. A second output terminal group for outputting an image signal,
前記第 1の接続切換回路は、前記第 1の制御信号に基づき、前記第 1の入力端子 群力 入力される画像信号を出力すべき出力端子群を前記第 1の出力端子群と前 記第 2の出力端子群との間で切り換えると共に、前記第 2の入力端子群力 入力され る画像信号を前記第 2の出力端子群力 出力する力否かを切り換えることを特徴とす る。 The first connection switching circuit includes a first output terminal group and an output terminal group to which an image signal to be input is output as the first output terminal group based on the first control signal. The second output terminal group is switched between two output terminal groups, and the second input terminal group force is switched to determine whether or not to output the input image signal to the second output terminal group force.
[0014] 本発明の第 3の局面は、本発明の第 1の局面において、 [0014] A third aspect of the present invention is the first aspect of the present invention,
前記データ信号生成回路は、 The data signal generation circuit includes:
各直並列変 カゝら出力されるパラレル信号を、各直並列変 が前記画像に
おける 1行分の画素を表す次のシリアル信号を入力してパラレル信号として出力する までの間、保持し出力する保持回路と、 The parallel signal output from each serial-parallel converter is converted into the image by each serial-parallel converter. A holding circuit for holding and outputting until the next serial signal representing pixels in one row is input and output as a parallel signal;
外部力も与えられる第 2の制御信号に基づき、前記保持回路からパラレル信号と して出力される信号のうち前記 1行分の画素のそれぞれを形成する所定数の副画素 形成部が取り込むべき副画素データに相当する信号力 なる同一画素信号群を構 成する信号を順次選択して出力する第 2の接続切換回路と、 Based on a second control signal to which an external force is also applied, a predetermined number of subpixels that form each of the pixels for one row of signals output as parallel signals from the holding circuit are to be taken in by the subpixel forming units A second connection switching circuit for sequentially selecting and outputting signals constituting the same pixel signal group having a signal power corresponding to data;
前記第 2の接続切換回路から出力される信号に基づき前記複数のデータ信号を 生成し出力する信号生成出力回路とを含むことを特徴とする。 And a signal generation / output circuit that generates and outputs the plurality of data signals based on a signal output from the second connection switching circuit.
[0015] 本発明の第 4の局面は、本発明の第 3の局面において、 [0015] A fourth aspect of the present invention is the third aspect of the present invention,
前記第 2の接続切換回路は、 The second connection switching circuit is
前記第 2の制御信号が第 1の所定信号である場合には、当該第 1の所定信号に 基づき、前記同一画素信号群を構成する信号を順次選択して出力し、 When the second control signal is a first predetermined signal, the signals constituting the same pixel signal group are sequentially selected and output based on the first predetermined signal,
前記第 2の制御信号が第 2の所定信号である場合には、前記同一画素信号群を 構成する全ての信号を選択して同時に出力することを特徴とする。 When the second control signal is a second predetermined signal, all signals constituting the same pixel signal group are selected and output simultaneously.
[0016] 本発明の第 5の局面は、列方向に延びる複数のデータ信号線と、当該複数のデー タ信号線と交差し行方向に延びる複数の走査信号線と、当該複数のデータ信号線と 当該複数の走査信号線との交差点にそれぞれ対応してマトリクス状に配置された複 数の副画素形成部とを備え、各副画素形成部は、対応する交差点を通る走査信号 線が選択されているときに対応するデータ信号線上の信号を副画素データとして取 り込む表示装置において、表示すべき画像を表す複数のデータ信号を前記複数の データ信号線に印加するための駆動回路であって、 [0016] A fifth aspect of the present invention provides a plurality of data signal lines extending in the column direction, a plurality of scanning signal lines intersecting with the plurality of data signal lines and extending in the row direction, and the plurality of data signal lines. And a plurality of subpixel forming portions arranged in a matrix corresponding to the intersections of the plurality of scanning signal lines, and each subpixel forming portion selects a scanning signal line passing through the corresponding intersection. A driving circuit for applying a plurality of data signals representing an image to be displayed to the plurality of data signal lines in a display device that captures a signal on a corresponding data signal line as sub-pixel data. ,
前記副画素データに相当する画像信号を前記画像の少なくとも 1行分ずつ保持す る保持回路と、 A holding circuit for holding an image signal corresponding to the sub-pixel data for at least one row of the image;
外部力も与えられる第 2の制御信号に基づき、前記保持回路に保持されている画 像信号のうち、前記少なくとも 1行分の画素のそれぞれを形成する所定数の副画素 形成部が取り込むべき副画素データに相当する信号からなる同一画素信号群のい ずれ力または全てを選択して出力する第 2の接続切換回路と、 Based on the second control signal to which an external force is also applied, out of the image signals held in the holding circuit, the sub-pixels to be taken in by a predetermined number of sub-pixel forming units forming each of the pixels for at least one row A second connection switching circuit for selecting and outputting any or all of the same pixel signal group consisting of signals corresponding to data;
前記第 2の接続切換回路から出力される信号に基づき前記複数のデータ信号を生
成するデータ信号生成回路とを備え、 The plurality of data signals are generated based on a signal output from the second connection switching circuit. A data signal generation circuit to be configured,
前記第 2の接続切換回路は、 The second connection switching circuit is
前記第 2の制御信号が第 1の所定信号である場合には、当該第 1の所定信号に 基づき、前記同一画素信号群を構成する信号を順次選択して出力し、 When the second control signal is a first predetermined signal, the signals constituting the same pixel signal group are sequentially selected and output based on the first predetermined signal,
前記第 2の制御信号が第 2の所定信号である場合には、前記同一画素信号群を 構成する全ての信号を選択して同時に出力することを特徴とする。 When the second control signal is a second predetermined signal, all signals constituting the same pixel signal group are selected and output simultaneously.
[0017] 本発明の第 6の局面は、表示装置であって、本発明の第 1から第 5の局面のいずれ カゝに係る駆動回路を備えたことを特徴とする。 [0017] A sixth aspect of the present invention is a display device, comprising a drive circuit according to any one of the first to fifth aspects of the present invention.
[0018] 本発明の第 7の局面は、視点の配置可能な第 1の所定領域に対して表示される第 1の画像と視点の配置可能な第 2の所定領域に対して表示される第 2の画像とが異 なるように当該第 1および第 2の画像を形成する第 1の表示装置を駆動するための第 1の動作モードと、前記第 1および第 2の所定領域に対して同一画像が表示されるよ うに当該同一画像を形成する第 2の表示装置を駆動するための第 2の動作モードと を有する駆動回路であって、 [0018] The seventh aspect of the present invention is the first image displayed for the first predetermined area where the viewpoint can be arranged and the second image displayed for the second predetermined area where the viewpoint can be arranged. The first operation mode for driving the first display device that forms the first and second images to be different from the second image, and the same for the first and second predetermined regions A driving circuit having a second operation mode for driving the second display device that forms the same image so that the image is displayed,
前記第 1および第 2の表示装置のそれぞれは、 Each of the first and second display devices is
列方向に延びる複数のデータ信号線と、 A plurality of data signal lines extending in the column direction;
前記複数のデータ信号線と交差し行方向に延びる複数の走査信号線と、 前記複数のデータ信号線と当該複数の走査信号線との交差点にそれぞれ対応し てマトリクス状に配置された複数の副画素形成部とを備え、 A plurality of scanning signal lines that intersect the plurality of data signal lines and extend in the row direction; and a plurality of sub signal lines arranged in a matrix corresponding to the intersections of the plurality of data signal lines and the plurality of scanning signal lines, respectively. A pixel forming portion,
前記第 1および第 2の表示装置における各副画素形成部は、対応する交差点を通 る走査信号線が選択されているときに対応するデータ信号線上の信号を副画素デー タとして取り込み、 Each sub-pixel forming unit in the first and second display devices takes in a signal on the corresponding data signal line as sub-pixel data when a scanning signal line passing through the corresponding intersection is selected,
前記第 1の表示装置の前記複数の副画素形成部は、前記第 1の画像を形成するた めの第 1の副画素形成部群と前記第 2の画像を形成するための第 2の副画素形成部 群とからなり、当該第 1の副画素形成部群と当該第 2の副画素形成部群とは交互に 列状に配置され、 The plurality of subpixel forming portions of the first display device include a first subpixel forming portion group for forming the first image and a second subpixel forming portion for forming the second image. The first sub-pixel forming unit group and the second sub-pixel forming unit group are alternately arranged in a line,
前記第 2の表示装置の前記複数の副画素形成部は、前記同一画像を形成し、 当該駆動回路は、表示すべき画像を表す複数のデータ信号を生成し前記複数の
データ信号線に印加するためのデータ信号線駆動回路を含み、 The plurality of sub-pixel forming units of the second display device form the same image, and the driving circuit generates a plurality of data signals representing images to be displayed, and Including a data signal line driving circuit for applying to the data signal line;
前記データ信号線駆動回路は、 The data signal line driving circuit includes:
前記第 1の画像または前記同一画像を表す画像信号を画素単位または副画素 単位のシリアル信号として受け取るための第 1の入力端子群と、前記第 2の画像を表 す画像信号を画素単位または副画素単位のシリアル信号として受け取るための第 2 の入力端子群とを有し、 A first input terminal group for receiving the first image or the image signal representing the same image as a serial signal in pixel units or sub-pixel units, and the image signal representing the second image as pixel units or sub-pixels. A second input terminal group for receiving as a serial signal in pixel units,
前記第 1の動作モードでは、前記第 1の入力端子群から入力される前記第 1の画 像を表す画像信号に基づき、前記第 1の副画素形成部群に対応するデータ信号線 に印加すべきデータ信号を生成すると共に、前記第 2の入力端子群力 入力される 前記第 2の画像を表す画像信号に基づき、前記第 2の副画素形成部群に対応する データ信号線に印加すべきデータ信号を生成し、 In the first operation mode, an image signal representing the first image input from the first input terminal group is applied to a data signal line corresponding to the first sub-pixel forming unit group. To generate a power data signal and to apply to the data signal line corresponding to the second sub-pixel forming unit group based on the image signal representing the second image input to the second input terminal group force Generate a data signal,
前記第 2の動作モードでは、前記第 1の入力端子群から入力される前記同一画像 を表す画像信号に基づき、前記第 2の表示装置の前記複数のデータ信号線に印加 すべきデータ信号を生成することを特徴とする。 本発明の第 8の局面は、本発明の第 7の局面において、 In the second operation mode, a data signal to be applied to the plurality of data signal lines of the second display device is generated based on an image signal representing the same image input from the first input terminal group. It is characterized by doing. The eighth aspect of the present invention is the seventh aspect of the present invention,
前記データ信号線駆動回路は、 The data signal line driving circuit includes:
前記第 1および第 2の入力端子群と、前記第 1および第 2の入力端子群から入力 される画像信号を画素単位または副画素単位のシリアル信号として出力するための 所定数の出力端子群と有し、当該駆動回路の動作モードが第 1の動作モードか第 2 の動作モードかに応じて、前記第 1および第 2の入力端子群の各入力端子群から入 力される画像信号を出力すべき出力端子群を前記所定数の出力端子群の間で切り 替えるための接続切換回路と、 The first and second input terminal groups, and a predetermined number of output terminal groups for outputting image signals input from the first and second input terminal groups as pixel-unit or sub-pixel unit serial signals; Output image signals input from the input terminal groups of the first and second input terminal groups according to whether the operation mode of the drive circuit is the first operation mode or the second operation mode. A connection switching circuit for switching an output terminal group to be switched between the predetermined number of output terminal groups;
前記所定数の出力端子群の各出力端子群に対応して設けられ、対応する出力端 子群から出力される画像信号をシリアル信号として入力しパラレル信号として出力す る直並列変換器と、 A serial-parallel converter that is provided corresponding to each output terminal group of the predetermined number of output terminal groups, and that inputs an image signal output from the corresponding output terminal group as a serial signal and outputs it as a parallel signal;
各直並列変 力 出力されるパラレル信号に基づき前記複数のデータ信号を生 成するデータ信号生成回路とを含み、 A data signal generation circuit for generating the plurality of data signals based on the parallel signals to be output,
前記接続切換回路は、
前記第 1の動作モードでは、前記第 1の画像を表す画像信号が入力される直並 列変 カゝら出力されるパラレル信号に基づき、前記第 1の副画素形成部群に対応 するデータ信号線に印加すべきデータ信号が前記データ信号生成回路によって生 成されると共に、前記第 2の画像を表す画像信号が入力される直並列変 力ゝら出 力されるパラレル信号に基づき、前記第 2の副画素形成部群に対応するデータ信号 線に印加すべきデータ信号が前記データ信号生成回路によって生成されるように、 前記第 1および第 2の入力端子群と前記所定数の出力端子群とを接続し、 The connection switching circuit is In the first operation mode, a data signal corresponding to the first sub-pixel forming unit group based on a parallel signal output from a serial parallel transformation to which an image signal representing the first image is input. A data signal to be applied to the line is generated by the data signal generation circuit, and based on the parallel signal output from the serial / parallel transformation to which the image signal representing the second image is input, the first signal is generated. The first and second input terminal groups and the predetermined number of output terminal groups so that the data signal to be applied to the data signal lines corresponding to the two sub-pixel forming unit groups is generated by the data signal generation circuit. And connect
前記第 2の動作モードでは、各直並列変翻から出力されるノ ラレル信号に基づ き、前記第 2の表示装置における前記複数のデータ信号線に印加すべきデータ信号 が前記データ信号生成回路によって生成されるように、前記第 1の入力端子群と前 記所定数の出力端子群とを接続することを特徴とする。 In the second operation mode, a data signal to be applied to the plurality of data signal lines in the second display device based on the normal signal output from each series-parallel conversion is the data signal generation circuit. The first input terminal group and the predetermined number of output terminal groups are connected to each other as generated by the above.
本発明の第 9の局面は、列方向に延びる複数のデータ信号線と、当該複数のデー タ信号線と交差し行方向に延びる複数の走査信号線と、当該複数のデータ信号線と 当該複数の走査信号線との交差点にそれぞれ対応してマトリクス状に配置された複 数の副画素形成部とを備え、各副画素形成部は、対応する交差点を通る走査信号 線が選択されているときに対応するデータ信号線上の信号を副画素データとして取 り込む表示装置において、表示すべき画像を表す複数のデータ信号を前記複数の データ信号線に印加するための駆動方法であって、 According to a ninth aspect of the present invention, there are provided a plurality of data signal lines extending in the column direction, a plurality of scanning signal lines intersecting with the plurality of data signal lines and extending in the row direction, the plurality of data signal lines, and the plurality of data signals lines. A plurality of sub-pixel forming portions arranged in a matrix corresponding to each of the intersections with the scanning signal lines, and each sub-pixel forming portion is selected when a scanning signal line passing through the corresponding intersection is selected. A display device that captures a signal on a data signal line corresponding to a subpixel data as a drive method for applying a plurality of data signals representing an image to be displayed to the plurality of data signal lines,
前記画像を表す画像信号を画素単位または副画素単位のシリアル信号として受け 取るための所定数の入力端子群と、前記入力端子群から入力される画像信号を画 素単位または副画素単位のシリアル信号として出力するための所定数の出力端子群 と有する第 1の接続切換回路において、外部力 与えられる第 1の制御信号に基づ き、前記所定数の入力端子群の各入力端子群から入力される画像信号を出力すベ き出力端子群を前記所定数の出力端子群の間で切り替える第 1の接続切換ステップ と、 A predetermined number of input terminal groups for receiving image signals representing the image as serial signals in pixel units or sub-pixel units, and image signals input from the input terminal groups as serial signals in pixel units or sub-pixel units In the first connection switching circuit having a predetermined number of output terminal groups for output as a first input signal, the first connection switching circuit is input from each input terminal group of the predetermined number of input terminal groups based on a first control signal given by an external force. A first connection switching step for switching an output terminal group to output an image signal between the predetermined number of output terminal groups;
前記所定数の出力端子群の各出力端子群力 シリアル信号として出力される画像 信号をパラレル信号に変換して出力する直並列変換ステップと、 A serial-parallel conversion step of converting the image signal output as a serial signal into a parallel signal and outputting it as a parallel signal.
前記直並列変換ステップで出力されるパラレル信号に基づき前記複数のデータ信
号を生成するデータ信号生成ステップとを備えることを特徴とする。 The plurality of data signals based on the parallel signal output in the serial-parallel conversion step. And a data signal generation step of generating a signal.
[0021] 本発明の第 10の局面は、本発明の第 9の局面において、 [0021] A tenth aspect of the present invention is the ninth aspect of the present invention,
前記複数の副画素形成部は、視点の配置可能な第 1の所定領域に対して表示さ れる第 1の画像を形成するための第 1の副画素形成部群と、視点の配置可能な第 2 の所定領域に対して表示される第 2の画像を形成するための第 2の副画素形成部群 とからなり、 The plurality of sub-pixel forming units includes a first sub-pixel forming unit group for forming a first image displayed for a first predetermined region where a viewpoint can be arranged, and a first sub-pixel forming unit capable of arranging a viewpoint. A second sub-pixel forming unit group for forming a second image displayed for a predetermined area of
前記所定数の入力端子群は、前記第 1または第 2の画像を表す画像信号を受け取 るための第 1の入力端子群と、前記第 2の画像を表す画像信号を受け取るための第 2 の入力端子群とを含み、 The predetermined number of input terminal groups includes a first input terminal group for receiving an image signal representing the first or second image, and a second input terminal for receiving the image signal representing the second image. Input terminal group,
前記所定数の出力端子群は、前記第 1の入力端子群から入力される画像信号を出 力するための第 1の出力端子群と、前記第 1または第 2の入力端子群から入力される 画像信号を出力するための第 2の出力端子群とを含み、 The predetermined number of output terminal groups are input from a first output terminal group for outputting an image signal input from the first input terminal group and from the first or second input terminal group. A second output terminal group for outputting an image signal,
前記第 1の接続切換ステップでは、前記第 1の制御信号に基づき、前記第 1の入力 端子群力 入力される画像信号を出力すべき出力端子群が前記第 1の出力端子群 と前記第 2の出力端子群との間で切り換えられると共に、前記第 2の入力端子群から 入力される画像信号が前記第 2の出力端子群力 出力する力否かが切り換えられる ことを特徴とする。 In the first connection switching step, based on the first control signal, the first input terminal group force is an output terminal group to which an input image signal is to be output, the first output terminal group and the second output terminal group. The output terminal group is switched between and whether the image signal input from the second input terminal group outputs the second output terminal group force or not is switched.
[0022] 本発明の第 11の局面は、本発明の第 9の局面において、 [0022] An eleventh aspect of the present invention is the ninth aspect of the present invention,
前記データ信号生成ステップは、 The data signal generation step includes
前記直並列変換ステップで出力されるパラレル信号を、前記直並列変換ステップ で前記画像における 1行分の画素を表す次のシリアル信号が入力されパラレル信号 として出力されるまでの間、保持し出力する保持ステップと、 The parallel signal output in the serial-parallel conversion step is held and output until the next serial signal representing one row of pixels in the image is input and output as a parallel signal in the serial-parallel conversion step. Holding step;
外部力も与えられる第 2の制御信号に基づき、前記保持ステップでパラレル信号 として出力される信号のうち前記 1行分の画素のそれぞれを形成する所定数の副画 素形成部が取り込むべき副画素データに相当する信号力 なる同一画素信号群を 構成する信号を順次選択して出力する第 2の接続切換ステップと、 Based on the second control signal to which an external force is also applied, sub-pixel data to be taken in by a predetermined number of sub-pixel forming units forming each of the pixels for one row of the signals output as parallel signals in the holding step A second connection switching step for sequentially selecting and outputting signals constituting the same pixel signal group having a signal power equivalent to
前記第 2の接続切換ステップで出力される信号に基づき前記複数のデータ信号 を生成し出力する信号生成出力ステップとを含むことを特徴とする。
[0023] 本発明の第 12の局面は、本発明の第 11の局面において And a signal generation output step of generating and outputting the plurality of data signals based on the signal output in the second connection switching step. [0023] A twelfth aspect of the present invention is the eleventh aspect of the present invention.
前記第 2の接続切換ステップは、 The second connection switching step includes:
前記第 2の制御信号が第 1の所定信号である場合には、当該第 1の所定信号に 基づき、前記同一画素信号群を構成する信号を順次選択して出力するステップと、 前記第 2の制御信号が第 2の所定信号である場合には、前記同一画素信号群を 構成する全ての信号を選択して同時に出力するステップとを含むことを特徴とする。 When the second control signal is a first predetermined signal, a step of sequentially selecting and outputting signals constituting the same pixel signal group based on the first predetermined signal; and When the control signal is the second predetermined signal, the method includes selecting and simultaneously outputting all signals constituting the same pixel signal group.
[0024] 本発明の第 13の局面は、列方向に延びる複数のデータ信号線と、当該複数のデ ータ信号線と交差し行方向に延びる複数の走査信号線と、当該複数のデータ信号 線と当該複数の走査信号線との交差点にそれぞれ対応してマトリクス状に配置され た複数の副画素形成部とを備え、各副画素形成部は、対応する交差点を通る走査 信号線が選択されているときに対応するデータ信号線上の信号を副画素データとし て取り込む表示装置にお!ヽて、表示すべき画像を表す複数のデータ信号を前記複 数のデータ信号線に印加するための駆動方法であって、 A thirteenth aspect of the present invention provides a plurality of data signal lines extending in the column direction, a plurality of scanning signal lines intersecting with the plurality of data signal lines and extending in the row direction, and the plurality of data signals. A plurality of sub-pixel forming portions arranged in a matrix corresponding to the intersections of the lines and the plurality of scanning signal lines, and each sub-pixel forming portion selects a scanning signal line passing through the corresponding intersection. Drive for applying a plurality of data signals representing an image to be displayed to the plurality of data signal lines in a display device that captures signals on the corresponding data signal lines as sub-pixel data. A method,
前記副画素データに相当する画像信号を前記画像の少なくとも 1行分ずつ保持す る保持ステップと、 A holding step of holding an image signal corresponding to the sub-pixel data for at least one row of the image;
外部力も与えられる第 2の制御信号に基づき、前記保持ステップで保持されて!、る 画像信号のうち前記 1行分の画素のそれぞれを形成する所定数の副画素形成部が 取り込むべき副画素データに相当する信号力もなる同一画素信号群のいずれかまた は全てを選択して出力する第 2の接続切換ステップと、 Based on the second control signal to which an external force is also applied, the sub-pixel data to be taken in by a predetermined number of sub-pixel forming units that form each of the pixels for the one row of the image signal is held in the holding step! A second connection switching step of selecting and outputting any or all of the same pixel signal group having a signal power corresponding to
前記第 2の接続切換ステップで出力される信号に基づき前記複数のデータ信号を 生成するデータ信号生成ステップとを備え、 A data signal generating step for generating the plurality of data signals based on the signal output in the second connection switching step;
前記第 2の接続切換ステップは、 The second connection switching step includes:
前記第 2の制御信号が第 1の所定信号である場合には、当該第 1の所定信号に 基づき、前記同一画素信号群を構成する信号を順次選択して出力するステップと、 前記第 2の制御信号が第 2の所定信号である場合には、前記同一画素信号群を 構成する全ての信号を選択して同時に出力するステップとを含むことを特徴とする。 発明の効果 When the second control signal is a first predetermined signal, a step of sequentially selecting and outputting signals constituting the same pixel signal group based on the first predetermined signal; and When the control signal is the second predetermined signal, the method includes selecting and simultaneously outputting all signals constituting the same pixel signal group. The invention's effect
[0025] 本発明の第 1の局面によれば、第 1の接続切換回路における所定数の出力端子群
にそれぞれ対応して設けられた直並列変 力も出力されるノ ラレル信号に基づい て、表示パネルのデータ信号線に印加すべきデータ信号が生成される。そして、外 部から与えられる第 1の制御信号に基づき、所定数の入力端子群の各入力端子群 力 入力される画像信号を出力すべき出力端子群を所定数の出力端子群の間で切 り替えることができる。したがって、第 1の制御信号を設定または切り替えることにより、 表示すべき画像を表す信号 (表示データ)として各入力端子群から入力される画像 信号をその入力形式に応じて適切ないずれかの直並列変換器に入力することがで きる。したがって、別途インタフェース回路を用意することなぐ種々の入力形式の表 示データを入力して表示パネルのデータ信号線を適切に駆動することができる。 [0025] According to the first aspect of the present invention, a predetermined number of output terminal groups in the first connection switching circuit. A data signal to be applied to the data signal line of the display panel is generated on the basis of the normal signal that is also output corresponding to each of the series and parallel transformations. Then, based on the first control signal given from the outside, each input terminal group of the predetermined number of input terminal groups is switched between the predetermined number of output terminal groups. Can be replaced. Therefore, by setting or switching the first control signal, an image signal input from each input terminal group as a signal (display data) representing an image to be displayed is displayed in any appropriate series-parallel manner according to the input format. Can be input to the converter. Therefore, it is possible to input display data of various input formats without separately preparing an interface circuit and appropriately drive the data signal lines of the display panel.
[0026] 本発明の第 2の局面によれば、視点の配置可能な第 1の所定領域に対して表示さ れる第 1の画像の信号と、視点の配置可能な第 2の所定領域に対して表示される第 2 の画像の信号という 2系統の画像信号が同時に入力される場合 (DV2系統同時入力 形式の場合)には、第 1の接続切換回路において、第 1の制御信号の設定により、第 1入力端子群力 入力される第 1の画像の信号を第 1の出力端子群力 出力して対 応する直並列変^^に与えるとともに、第 2入力端子群力 入力される第 2の画像の 信号を第 2の出力端子群力も出力して対応する直並列変^^に与えることができる。 一方、第 1の画像の 1行分の画像データと第 2の画像の 1行分の画像データとが交互 に入力される場合 (DV表示マッピング入力形式の場合)には、第 1の制御信号の設 定の切換により、第 1の入力端子群力も第 1の画像信号が入力されるときには、その 第 1の画像信号を第 1の出力端子力 出力して対応する直並列変 に与えるとと もに、第 1の入力端子群力も第 2の画像信号が入力されるときには、その第 2の画像 信号を第 2の出力端子力も出力して対応する直並列変^^に与えることができる。こ のようにして、 DV (デュアルビュー)表示装置の表示パネルを駆動する場合にぉ ヽて 、別途インタフェース回路を用意することなぐ少なくとも上記 2種類の入力形式に対 応することができる。 [0026] According to the second aspect of the present invention, the signal of the first image displayed for the first predetermined area where the viewpoint can be arranged and the second predetermined area where the viewpoint can be arranged When two image signals, the second image signal displayed at the same time, are input simultaneously (in the case of DV2 simultaneous input format), the first connection switching circuit sets the first control signal. The first input terminal group force The first image signal input to the first output terminal group force is output to the corresponding series-parallel variable ^^ and the second input terminal group force is input to the second input terminal group force. The image signal of can be output to the second output terminal group force and given to the corresponding series-parallel variable. On the other hand, when the image data for one row of the first image and the image data for one row of the second image are input alternately (in the case of the DV display mapping input format), the first control signal When the first image signal is also input to the first input terminal group force by switching the setting, the first image signal is output to the first output terminal force and applied to the corresponding series-parallel change. In addition, when the second input image group force is input to the second image signal, the second image signal can also be output to the corresponding series-parallel variable by outputting the second output terminal force. In this way, when driving a display panel of a DV (Dual View) display device, it is possible to support at least the above two types of input formats without preparing a separate interface circuit.
[0027] 本発明の第 3の局面によれば、外部力も与えられる第 2の制御信号に基づき、保持 回路からパラレル信号として出力される信号のうち表示すべき画像の 1行分の画素の それぞれを形成する所定数の副画素形成部が取り込むべき副画素データに相当す
る信号からなる同一画素信号群を構成する信号が順次選択されて出力され、そのよ うに順次選択される信号に基づき、データ信号線に印加すべきデータ信号が生成さ れる。したがって、表示すべき画像の 1画素を形成するための所定数の副画素形成 部(例えば R副画素、 G副画素、 B副画素力 なる 3副画素形成部)が列方向に配置 されかつ同一のデータ信号線に接続されているような構成の表示パネル (例えば横 長画素配置構成の DV液晶パネル)におけるデータ信号線を時分割出力により適切 に駆動することができる。 [0027] According to the third aspect of the present invention, each of the pixels for one row of the image to be displayed among the signals output as parallel signals from the holding circuit based on the second control signal to which an external force is also applied. This corresponds to sub-pixel data to be taken in by a predetermined number of sub-pixel forming portions that form The signals constituting the same pixel signal group consisting of the signals are sequentially selected and output, and the data signal to be applied to the data signal line is generated based on the sequentially selected signals. Therefore, a predetermined number of sub-pixel forming portions (for example, three sub-pixel forming portions having R sub-pixel, G sub-pixel, and B sub-pixel force) for forming one pixel of an image to be displayed are arranged in the column direction and are the same The data signal lines in a display panel configured to be connected to the data signal lines (for example, a DV liquid crystal panel having a horizontally long pixel arrangement) can be appropriately driven by time-division output.
[0028] 本発明の第 4または第 5の局面によれば、第 2の制御信号が第 1の所定信号である 場合には、当該第 1の所定信号に基づき、同一画素信号群を構成する信号が順次 選択されて出力され、第 2の制御信号が第 2の所定信号である場合には、同一画素 信号群を構成する全ての信号が選択されて同時に出力される。したがって、第 2の制 御信号を設定または切り替えることにより、データ信号の出力形式を同一画素信号 群につき独立出力形式とすることも時分割出力形式とすることができるので、表示パ ネルが縦長画素配置構成と横長画素配置構成のいずれであっても表示パネルのデ ータ信号線を適切に駆動することができる。 [0028] According to the fourth or fifth aspect of the present invention, when the second control signal is the first predetermined signal, the same pixel signal group is configured based on the first predetermined signal. When the signals are sequentially selected and output, and the second control signal is the second predetermined signal, all signals constituting the same pixel signal group are selected and output simultaneously. Therefore, by setting or switching the second control signal, the output format of the data signal can be changed to an independent output format for the same pixel signal group, or a time-division output format. The data signal line of the display panel can be appropriately driven regardless of the arrangement configuration or the horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration.
[0029] 本発明の第 6の局面によれば、本発明の第 1から第 5の局面と同様の効果を奏する 駆動回路を備えた表示装置を提供することができる。 [0029] According to the sixth aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a display device including a drive circuit that exhibits the same effects as the first to fifth aspects of the present invention.
[0030] 本発明の第 7の局面に係る駆動回路では、第 1の動作モードにおいて、第 1の入力 端子群から入力される第 1の画像を表す画像信号に基づき、第 1の副画素形成部群 に対応するデータ信号線に印加すべきデータ信号が生成されると共に、第 2の入力 端子群から入力される第 2の画像を表す画像信号に基づき、第 2の副画素形成部群 に対応するデータ信号線に印加すべきデータ信号が生成され、第 2の動作モードに おいて、第 1の入力端子群から入力される画像信号に基づき、第 1および第 2の所定 領域に対して同一画像を表示する第 2の表示装置の前記複数のデータ信号線に印 加すべきデータ信号が生成される。したがって、本発明の第 7の局面によれば、 DV 液晶表示装置等のような第 1の表示装置と SV液晶表示装置等のような第 2の表示装 置とのいずれにおいてもデータ信号線の駆動に使用可能な駆動回路を提供すること ができる。
図面の簡単な説明 [0030] In the drive circuit according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, in the first operation mode, the first subpixel formation is performed based on the image signal representing the first image input from the first input terminal group. A data signal to be applied to the data signal line corresponding to the group of pixels is generated, and the second subpixel formation unit group is generated based on the image signal representing the second image input from the second input terminal group. A data signal to be applied to the corresponding data signal line is generated, and in the second operation mode, the first and second predetermined regions are applied based on the image signal input from the first input terminal group. Data signals to be applied to the plurality of data signal lines of the second display device that displays the same image are generated. Therefore, according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, the data signal line is connected to both the first display device such as a DV liquid crystal display device and the second display device such as an SV liquid crystal display device. A driving circuit that can be used for driving can be provided. Brief Description of Drawings
[図 1]本発明の第 1の実施形態に係る液晶表示装置の全体構成を示すブロック図で ある。 FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an overall configuration of a liquid crystal display device according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
[図 2]上記第 1の実施形態における 1つの副画素形成部の等価回路を示す回路図で ある。 FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing an equivalent circuit of one sub-pixel forming unit in the first embodiment.
[図 3]上記第 1の実施形態における液晶パネルの構造を説明するための断面図であ る。 FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view for explaining the structure of the liquid crystal panel in the first embodiment.
[図 4]上記第 1の実施形態においてデュアルビュー表示を実現するための構成を模 式的に示す平面図 (A)および断面図(B)である。 FIG. 4 is a plan view (A) and a cross-sectional view (B) schematically showing a configuration for realizing dual view display in the first embodiment.
[図 5]上記第 1の実施形態におけるデータドライバに供給すべき画像信号の表す入 力データのフォーマットを示す図(A、 B)である。 FIG. 5 is a diagram (A, B) showing a format of input data represented by an image signal to be supplied to the data driver in the first embodiment.
[図 6]上記第 1の実施形態におけるデータドライバの構成例を示すブロック図である。 FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data driver in the first embodiment.
[図 7]上記構成例によるデータドライバにおける入力側セレクタの動作を示す真理値 表を示す図 (A)および出力側セレクタの動作を示す真理値表を示す図(B)である。 FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a truth table showing the operation of the input-side selector in the data driver according to the above configuration example, and FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a truth table showing the operation of the output-side selector.
[図 8]上記構成例によるデータドライバにおける入力側セレクタの動作を説明するた めのタイミングチャート(A〜C)である。 FIG. 8 is a timing chart (A to C) for explaining the operation of the input side selector in the data driver according to the above configuration example.
[図 9]上記構成例によるデータドライバにおける時分割出力のための出力側セレクタ の動作を説明するためのタイミングチャート (A〜F)である。 FIG. 9 is a timing chart (A to F) for explaining the operation of the output side selector for time division output in the data driver according to the above configuration example.
[図 10]上記構成例によるデータドライバの 2系統同時入力モードでの(主として入力 側の)動作を説明するためのタイミングチャート (A〜G)である。 FIG. 10 is a timing chart (A to G) for explaining the operation (mainly on the input side) of the data driver according to the above configuration example in the two-system simultaneous input mode.
[図 11]上記構成例によるデータドライバの 2系統同時入力モードでの(主として出力 側の)動作を説明するためのタイミングチャート (A〜I)である。 FIG. 11 is a timing chart (A to I) for explaining the operation (mainly on the output side) of the data driver according to the above configuration example in the two-system simultaneous input mode.
[図 12]上記構成例によるデータドライバの表示マッピング入力モードでの(主として入 力側の)動作を説明するためのタイミングチャート (A〜F)である。 FIG. 12 is a timing chart (A to F) for explaining the operation (mainly on the input side) in the display mapping input mode of the data driver according to the above configuration example.
[図 13]上記第 1の実施形態におけるデータドライバの第 1の変形例を示すブロック図 である。 FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing a first modification of the data driver in the first embodiment.
[図 14]上記第 1の実施形態におけるデータドライバの第 2の変形例を示すブロック図 である。
圆 15]上記第 2の変形例における出力側セレクタの動作を示す真理値表を示す図で ある。 FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing a second modification of the data driver in the first embodiment. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a truth table showing the operation of the output side selector in the second modified example.
圆 16]上記第 2の変形例の(主として出力側の)動作を説明するためのタイミングチヤ ート(A〜I)である。 16) A timing chart (A to I) for explaining the operation (mainly on the output side) of the second modified example.
圆 17]本発明の第 2の実施形態に係る液晶表示用のデータドライバの構成を示すブ ロック図である。 FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a data driver for liquid crystal display according to a second embodiment of the present invention.
圆 18]上記第 2の実施形態に係るデータドライバにおける入力側セレクタの動作を示 す真理値表を示す図 (A)および出力側セレクタの動作を示す真理値表を示す図(B )である。 18] A diagram showing a truth table showing the operation of the input-side selector in the data driver according to the second embodiment (A) and a diagram showing a truth table showing the operation of the output-side selector (B). .
圆 19]上記第 2の実施形態に係るデータドライバにおける入力側セレクタの動作を説 明するためのタイミングチャート(A〜E)である。 FIG. 19 is a timing chart (A to E) for explaining the operation of the input side selector in the data driver according to the second embodiment.
[図 20]上記第 2の実施形態に係るデータドライバにおける出力側セレクタの独立出力 モードでの動作を説明するためのタイミングチャート (A〜E)である。 FIG. 20 is a timing chart (A to E) for explaining the operation of the output-side selector in the independent output mode in the data driver according to the second embodiment.
圆 21]上記第 2の実施形態に係るデータドライバにおける出力側セレクタの時分割出 力モードでの動作を説明するためのタイミングチャート (A〜E)である。 21] Timing charts (A to E) for explaining the operation in the time division output mode of the output side selector in the data driver according to the second embodiment.
[図 22]縦長画素配置構成の DV液晶パネルを駆動する場合における上記第 2の実施 形態に係るデータドライバの同時入力モードでの(主として入力側の)動作を説明す るためのタイミングチャート(A〜F)である。 FIG. 22 is a timing chart for explaining the operation (mainly on the input side) of the data driver according to the second embodiment in the simultaneous input mode when driving a DV liquid crystal panel having a vertically long pixel arrangement configuration (A) ~ F).
[図 23]縦長画素配置構成の DV液晶パネルを駆動する場合における上記第 2の実施 形態に係るデータドライバの独立出力モードでの(主として出力側の)動作を説明す るためのタイミングチャート(A〜I)である。 FIG. 23 is a timing chart for explaining the operation (mainly on the output side) in the independent output mode of the data driver according to the second embodiment when driving a DV liquid crystal panel having a vertically long pixel arrangement configuration. ~ I).
[図 24]縦長画素配置構成の DV液晶パネルを駆動する場合における上記第 2の実施 形態に係るデータドライバの表示マッピング入力モードでの(主として入力側の)動作 を説明するためのタイミングチャート (A〜F)である。 FIG. 24 is a timing chart for explaining the operation (mainly on the input side) in the display mapping input mode of the data driver according to the second embodiment when driving a DV liquid crystal panel having a vertically long pixel arrangement configuration. ~ F).
[図 25]横長画素配置構成の DV液晶パネルを駆動する場合における上記第 2の実施 形態に係るデータドライバの同時入力モードでの(主として入力側の)動作を説明す るためのタイミングチャート(A〜F)である。 FIG. 25 is a timing chart for explaining the operation (mainly on the input side) in the simultaneous input mode of the data driver according to the second embodiment when driving a DV liquid crystal panel having a horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration. ~ F).
[図 26]横長画素配置構成の DV液晶パネルを駆動する場合における上記第 2の実施
形態に係るデータドライバの表示マッピング入力モードでの(主として入力側の)動作 を説明するためのタイミングチャート (A〜F)である。 [Fig.26] Second implementation when driving a DV LCD panel with a horizontally long pixel configuration 6 is a timing chart (A to F) for explaining the operation (mainly on the input side) in the display mapping input mode of the data driver according to the embodiment.
[図 27]縦長または横長画素配置構成の SV液晶パネルを駆動する場合における上記 第 2の実施形態に係るデータドライバのノーマル表示入力モードでの(主として入力 側の)動作を説明するためのタイミングチャート (A〜F)である。 FIG. 27 is a timing chart for explaining the operation (mainly on the input side) in the normal display input mode of the data driver according to the second embodiment when driving an SV liquid crystal panel with a vertically or horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration. (A to F).
[図 28]縦長画素配置構成の SV液晶パネルを駆動する場合における上記第 2の実施 形態に係るデータドライバの独立出力モードでの(主として出力側の)動作を説明す るためのタイミングチャート(A〜I)である。 FIG. 28 is a timing chart for explaining the operation (mainly on the output side) in the independent output mode of the data driver according to the second embodiment when driving an SV liquid crystal panel having a vertically long pixel arrangement configuration. ~ I).
[図 29]横長画素配置構成の SV液晶パネルを駆動する場合における上記第 2の実施 形態に係るデータドライバの時分割出力モードでの(主として出力側の)動作を説明 するためのタイミングチャート(A〜I)である。 FIG. 29 is a timing chart for explaining the operation (mainly on the output side) in the time division output mode of the data driver according to the second embodiment when driving an SV liquid crystal panel having a horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration. ~ I).
[図 30]従来のデュアルビュー液晶表示装置の画素配置を示す図 (A〜C)である。 符号の説明 FIG. 30 is a diagram (A to C) showing a pixel arrangement of a conventional dual view liquid crystal display device. Explanation of symbols
10 …薄膜トランジスタ (TFT) 10 ... Thin film transistor (TFT)
54 …視差バリア層 54… Parallax barrier layer
54b …視差バリア 54b… Parallax barrier
54s …スリット 54s… slit
56 〜CF基板 56 to CF substrate
58 …カラーフィルタ 58 Color filter
59 …対向電極(共通電極) 59… Counter electrode (common electrode)
60 …揿 S¾層 60… 揿 S¾ layer
62 …画素電極 62… Pixel electrode
66 〜TFT基板 66-TFT substrate
70 …副画素 70… Subpixel
200 …表示制御回路 200 ... Display control circuit
300 • "データドライバ (データ信号線駆動回路) 300 • “Data driver (data signal line drive circuit)
302 …入力側セレクタ (第 1の接続切換回路) 302 ... Input side selector (first connection switching circuit)
304Rl〜304Br …ラインメモリ
306 …ラッチ回路 304Rl to 304Br ... Line memory 306 ... Latch circuit
308 • · -出力側セレクタ (第 2の接続切換回路) 308 • · -Output selector (second connection switching circuit)
310 •••DZA変換回路 310 • DZA conversion circuit
400 …ゲートドライバ(走査信号線駆動回路) 400 ... Gate driver (scanning signal line drive circuit)
600 …液晶パネル 600… LCD panel
Al, Bl, C1 …第 1の入力端子群 Al, Bl, C1… First input terminal group
Dl, El, F1 …第 2の入力端子群 Dl, El, F1 ... 2nd input terminal group
1Y1, 1Y2, 1Y3 …第 1の出力端子群 1Y1, 1Y2, 1Y3… First output terminal group
1Y4, 1Y5, 1Y6 …第 2の出力端子群 1Y4, 1Y5, 1Y6… Second output terminal group
Clc …液晶容量(画素容量) Clc: Liquid crystal capacity (pixel capacity)
CS …共通電極線駆動回路 CS: Common electrode line drive circuit
Ec …対向電極(共通電極) Ec ... Counter electrode (common electrode)
Ep …画素電極 Ep… Pixel electrode
Ps (i, j) - ··副画素形成部(i = l〜3m、 j = l〜2n) Ps (i, j)--Sub-pixel formation part (i = l to 3m, j = l to 2n)
Pix …画素形成部 Pix ... Pixel formation part
G (i) …走査信号 (i= l〜3m) G (i) ... Scanning signal (i = l to 3m)
D (j) …データ信号 (j = l〜2n) D (j) ... Data signal (j = l to 2n)
DV1 • · '左画像のデジタル画像信号 DV1 • · 'Digital image signal of the left image
DV2 • · '右画像のデジタル画像信号 DV2 • · 'Digital image signal of the right image
Sa • · '入力側選択制御信号 (第 1の実施形態) Sa • · 'Input side selection control signal (first embodiment)
Sb, Sc • · -出力側選択制御信号 (第 1の実施形態) Sb, Sc • · -Output side selection control signal (first embodiment)
SI, S2 • · '入力側選択制御信号 (第 2の実施形態) SI, S2 • · 'Input side selection control signal (second embodiment)
S3, S4 • · -出力側選択制御信号 (第 2の実施形態) S3, S4 • · -Output side selection control signal (second embodiment)
発明を実施するための最良の形態 BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
< 1.第 1の実施形態 > <1. First Embodiment>
< 1. 1 全体の構成および動作 > <1.1 Overall configuration and operation>
図 1は、本発明における第 1の実施形態に係る液晶表示装置の構成を示すブロック 図である。この液晶表示装置は、視点の配置可能な 2つの領域に対して互いに異な
る画像を表示することができる表示装置、すなわち、表示画面に向力つて左または右 へ傾いた所定の角度力 見たときにそれぞれ異なる画像を表示することができる DV (デュアルビュー)液晶表示装置であって、表示制御回路 200と、データ信号線駆動 回路としてのデータドライバ 300と、走査信号線駆動回路としてのゲートドライバ 400 と、アクティブマトリクス型の液晶パネル 600とを備えている。以下では、表示画面に 向かって左力 見たときに表示される画像を「左画像」といい、右力 見たときに表示 される画像を「右画像」 t ヽぅ。 FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the liquid crystal display device according to the first embodiment of the present invention. This liquid crystal display device is different from each other in two areas where viewpoints can be arranged. Display device, that is, a DV (dual view) liquid crystal display device that can display different images when looking at a predetermined angle force tilted left or right on the display screen. The display control circuit 200 includes a data driver 300 as a data signal line driving circuit, a gate driver 400 as a scanning signal line driving circuit, and an active matrix liquid crystal panel 600. In the following, the image displayed when looking at the left force toward the display screen is called “left image”, and the image displayed when looking at the right force is called “right image” t t.
[0034] この液晶表示装置における表示部としての液晶パネル 600は、外部の所定の映像 ソース (CPUなど)から、左画像を表示するための画像データ Dvlと、右画像を表示 するための画像データ Dv2と、動作のタイミングを制御するための制御信号 TSとを 受け取る。なお、この左画像および右画像を液晶パネル 600に表示するための元の 画像は、液晶パネル 600の表示列における奇数列または偶数列のみに表示されるこ とにより正しく表示されるよう、水平方向(表示行方向)に(半分に)圧縮変形されてい るものとする。例えば、表示画面が 640列 480行で構成される場合、左画像および右 画像を表示するための元画像は 320列 480行で構成される。 [0034] A liquid crystal panel 600 as a display unit in the liquid crystal display device includes image data Dvl for displaying a left image and image data for displaying a right image from a predetermined external video source (CPU or the like). Dv2 and a control signal TS for controlling the operation timing are received. Note that the original image for displaying the left image and the right image on the liquid crystal panel 600 is displayed in the horizontal direction so that it is displayed correctly by being displayed only in the odd or even columns in the display column of the liquid crystal panel 600. It is assumed that it has been compressed (halved) in the (display line direction). For example, when the display screen is composed of 640 columns and 480 rows, the original image for displaying the left image and the right image is composed of 320 columns and 480 rows.
[0035] この液晶パネル 600は、上記画像データ Dvl, Dv2の表す画像における水平走査 線数 mの 3倍の本数(3m本)の走査信号線 Lgと、それら 3m本の走査信号線 Lgのそ れぞれと交差する 2n本のデータ信号線 Lsと、それら 3m本の走査信号線 Lgと 2n本 のデータ信号線 Lsとの交差点にそれぞれ対応して設けられた 3m X 2n個の副画素 形成部 Ps (l, l)〜Ps (3m, 2n)とを含む。また、この液晶パネル 600は、各副画素 形成部 Ps (l, l)〜Ps (3m, 2n)に含まれる画素電極に共通的に設けられかつ液晶 層を挟んで各画素電極と対向するように配置された共通電極を備えている。 The liquid crystal panel 600 includes three scanning signal lines Lg that are three times the number of horizontal scanning lines m (3m) in the image represented by the image data Dvl and Dv2, and the 3m scanning signal lines Lg. 2n data signal lines Ls intersecting with each other, and 3m x 2n subpixels formed corresponding to the intersections of these 3m scanning signal lines Lg and 2n data signal lines Ls, respectively Part Ps (l, l) to Ps (3m, 2n). Further, the liquid crystal panel 600 is provided in common to the pixel electrodes included in the sub-pixel forming portions Ps (l, l) to Ps (3m, 2n), and is opposed to the pixel electrodes with the liquid crystal layer interposed therebetween. Are provided with a common electrode.
[0036] 液晶パネル 600における 3m X 2n個の副画素形成部 Ps (l, l)〜Ps (3m, 2n)は 、図 1に示すように、データ信号線 Lsの延びる方向すなわち列方向に隣接する R副 画素と G副画素と B副画素の 3つの副画素形成部を単位としてマトリクス状に配置さ れており、当該 3つの副画素形成部により、この液晶パネル 600によって表示すべき カラー画像の各画素、すなわち上記画像データ Dvlの表す左画像および上記画像 データ Dv2の表す右画像の各画素を形成する(以下、表示すべき画像の 1画素に対
応する 3つの副画素形成部を「画素形成部」 t ヽ、符号" Pix"で示すものとする)。 したがって、 1つの表示行につき 3本の走査信号線が対応する。なお、図 1において 、各副画素形成部 Ps (i, j)に付されている" R""G""B"の各符号は、当該副画素形 成部 Ps (i, j)により表示される色が「赤」「緑」「青」のいずれであるかを示すものである As shown in FIG. 1, 3m × 2n sub-pixel forming portions Ps (l, l) to Ps (3m, 2n) in the liquid crystal panel 600 are adjacent to the extending direction of the data signal line Ls, that is, the column direction. The R subpixel, the G subpixel, and the B subpixel are arranged in a matrix in units of three subpixel formation portions, and the color image to be displayed on the liquid crystal panel 600 by the three subpixel formation portions. Each pixel of the left image represented by the image data Dvl and the right image represented by the image data Dv2 (hereinafter referred to as one pixel of the image to be displayed). The corresponding three sub-pixel forming portions are indicated by “pixel forming portion” t ヽ and the symbol “Pix”). Therefore, three scanning signal lines correspond to one display row. In FIG. 1, the symbols “R”, “G”, and “B” attached to each sub-pixel forming portion Ps (i, j) are displayed by the sub-pixel forming portion Ps (i, j). Indicates whether the color to be displayed is “red”, “green”, or “blue”
[0037] 表示制御回路 200は、外部から送られる上記画像データ Dvl, Dv2とタイミング制 御信号 TSとを受け取り、上記画像データ Dvl, Dv2にそれぞれ相当する画像信号 を画素単位でデジタル画像信号 DV1, DV2として出力すると共に、液晶パネル 600 に画像を表示するタイミングを制御するためのデータ用スタートパルス信号 DSP、デ ータ用クロック信号 DCK、ラッチストローブ信号 LS、ゲート用スタートパルス信号 GS P、およびゲート用クロック信号 GCKとを含む各種信号を出力する。 [0037] The display control circuit 200 receives the image data Dvl, Dv2 and the timing control signal TS sent from the outside, and converts the image signals corresponding to the image data Dvl, Dv2 respectively to the digital image signal DV1, DV1. Data start pulse signal DSP, data clock signal DCK, latch strobe signal LS, gate start pulse signal GS P, and gate to output as DV2 and control the timing of displaying images on LCD panel 600 Outputs various signals including clock signal GCK.
[0038] このようにして、表示制御回路 200によって生成される信号のうち、デジタル画像信 号 DV1, DV2、データ用スタートパルス信号 DSP、データ用クロック信号 DCK、およ びラッチストローブ信号 LSはデータドライバ 300に与えられ、ゲート用スタートパルス 信号 GSP、ゲート用クロック信号 GCKはゲートドライノ OOに与えられる。また、表示 制御回路 200は、上記クロック信号等に基づき、液晶パネル 600の交流化駆動のた めの極性切換制御信号を生成し、これをデータドライバ 300および図示されな ヽ共 通電極駆動回路に供給する。なお、この極性切換信号とそれに基づく交流化駆動は 、本発明に直接的には関係しないので、以下ではそれらの説明を省略する。 [0038] Of the signals generated by the display control circuit 200 in this way, the digital image signals DV1, DV2, the data start pulse signal DSP, the data clock signal DCK, and the latch strobe signal LS are data. The gate start pulse signal GSP and the gate clock signal GCK are supplied to the driver 300, and are supplied to the gate dryer OO. In addition, the display control circuit 200 generates a polarity switching control signal for AC drive of the liquid crystal panel 600 based on the clock signal and the like, and this is used as the data driver 300 and a common electrode drive circuit (not shown). Supply. Since the polarity switching signal and the AC driving based on the polarity switching signal are not directly related to the present invention, the description thereof will be omitted below.
[0039] データドライバ 300は、デジタル画像信号 DV1, DV2、データ用クロック信号 DCK 、データ用スタートパルス信号 DSP、およびラッチストローブ信号 LS等に基づき、液 晶パネル 600を駆動するためのアナログ電圧をデータ信号 D (l) , D (2) , · ··, D (2n )として生成し、これらを液晶パネル 600における 2n本のデータ信号線 Lsにそれぞ れ印加する。 [0039] The data driver 300 generates an analog voltage for driving the liquid crystal panel 600 based on the digital image signals DV1, DV2, the data clock signal DCK, the data start pulse signal DSP, the latch strobe signal LS, and the like. Signals D (l), D (2),..., D (2n) are generated and applied to 2n data signal lines Ls in the liquid crystal panel 600, respectively.
[0040] ゲートドライノく 400は、ゲート用クロック信号 GCKおよびゲート用スタートパルス信 号 GSPに基づき、液晶パネル 600における走査信号線を 1Z3水平走査期間ずつ 順に選択するために各走査信号線に印加すべき走査信号 G (l) , G (2) , G (3) ,… , G (3m)を生成し、全走査信号線のそれぞれを順に選択するためのアクティブな走
查信号の各走査信号線への印加を 1垂直走査期間を周期として繰り返す。 [0040] Based on the gate clock signal GCK and the gate start pulse signal GSP, the gate dry 400 is applied to each scanning signal line to sequentially select the scanning signal lines in the liquid crystal panel 600 by 1Z3 horizontal scanning period. Generates scanning signals G (l), G (2), G (3), ..., G (3m) to be generated, and active scans to select each of all scanning signal lines in turn. The application of the 查 signal to each scanning signal line is repeated with one vertical scanning period as a cycle.
[0041] 上記のようにして液晶パネル 600では、デジタル画像信号 DV1, DV2に基づくデ ータ信号 D (1)〜D (2n)がデータ信号線 Lsに印加され、走査信号 G (1)〜G (3m) が走査信号線 Lgに印加される。また、共通電極には、共通電極駆動回路 (不図示) によって共通電圧信号が印加される。これにより、液晶パネル 600は、その液晶層に デジタル画像信号 DV1, DV2に応じた電圧を印加されることで光の透過率を変化さ せ、外部の映像ソースカゝら受け取った画像データ Dvl, Dv2の表す左画像および右 画像を表示する。これらの画像は表示画面を見る角度に応じて一方がはっきりと明る く見え、他方が暗く見えまたは全く見えなくなる。次に、このように異なる視点(2人の 使用者)に対して異なる画像を表示する液晶パネル 600の詳細にっ 、て説明する。 In the liquid crystal panel 600 as described above, the data signals D (1) to D (2n) based on the digital image signals DV1 and DV2 are applied to the data signal line Ls, and the scanning signals G (1) to G (3m) is applied to the scanning signal line Lg. A common voltage signal is applied to the common electrode by a common electrode drive circuit (not shown). As a result, the liquid crystal panel 600 changes the light transmittance by applying a voltage corresponding to the digital image signal DV1, DV2 to the liquid crystal layer, and receives the image data Dvl, Dv2 received from the external video source The left and right images represented by are displayed. Depending on the viewing angle of the display screen, one of these images appears clearly bright and the other appears dark or completely invisible. Next, details of the liquid crystal panel 600 that displays different images for different viewpoints (two users) will be described.
[0042] < 1. 2 液晶パネル > [0042] <1.2 LCD panel>
液晶パネル 600は、データドライバ 300に接続される 2n本のデータ信号線 Lsと、ゲ ートドライバ 400に接続される 3m本の走査信号線 Lgとを備え、当該 2n本のデータ信 号線 Lsと当該 3m本の走査信号線 Lgとは、各データ信号線 Lsと各走査信号線 Lgと が交差するように格子状に配設されている。そして、当該 2n本のデータ信号線 と 当該 3m本の走査信号線 Lgとの交差点に対応して 3mX 2n個の副画素形成部 Ps (1 , l)〜Ps (3m, 2n)がそれぞれ設けられている。 The liquid crystal panel 600 includes 2n data signal lines Ls connected to the data driver 300 and 3m scanning signal lines Lg connected to the gate driver 400, and the 2n data signal lines Ls and 3m The scanning signal lines Lg are arranged in a grid pattern so that each data signal line Ls and each scanning signal line Lg intersect each other. Then, 3m × 2n sub-pixel forming portions Ps (1, l) to Ps (3m, 2n) are provided corresponding to the intersections of the 2n data signal lines and the 3m scanning signal lines Lg, respectively. ing.
[0043] 既述のように、液晶パネル 600によって表示すべきカラー画像の各画素、すなわち 上記画像データ Dvl, Dv2の表す左画像および右画像の各画素は、列方向(デー タ信号線の延びる方向)に隣接する R副画素と G副画素と B副画素の 3つの副画素形 成部からなる画素形成部 Pixによって形成され、液晶パネル 600における 3m X 2n 個の副画素形成部 Ps (l, l)〜Ps (3m, 2n)は、これら 3つの副画素形成部を単位と してマトリクス状に配置されている(図 1参照)。図 2は、このような液晶パネル 600にお ける 1つの副画素形成部 Ps (i, j)の等価回路を示す回路図である (i= l, 2, · ··, 3m ;j = l, 2, · ··, 2n)。 [0043] As described above, each pixel of the color image to be displayed by the liquid crystal panel 600, that is, each pixel of the left image and the right image represented by the image data Dvl and Dv2, is in the column direction (the data signal line extends). 3m x 2n sub-pixel forming parts Ps (l in the liquid crystal panel 600 are formed by a pixel forming part Pix consisting of three sub-pixel forming parts of R sub-pixel, G sub-pixel and B sub-pixel adjacent to each other in the direction). , l) to Ps (3m, 2n) are arranged in a matrix with these three subpixel formation units as units (see Fig. 1). FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing an equivalent circuit of one sub-pixel forming portion Ps (i, j) in such a liquid crystal panel 600 (i = l, 2,..., 3m; j = l , 2, ..., 2n).
[0044] 各副画素形成部 Ps (i, j)は、図 2に示すように、対応する交差点を通過するデータ 信号線 Lsにソース端子が接続されるとともに、対応する交差点を通過する走査信号 線 Lgにゲート端子が接続された薄膜トランジスタ (Thin Film Transistor) (以下「TFT
」と略記する) 10と、その TFT10のドレイン端子に接続された画素電極 Epと、上記 3 m X 2n個の副画素形成部 Ps (l, l)〜Ps (3m, 2n)に共通的に設けられた共通電 極(「対向電極」ともいう) Ecと、上記 3m X 2n個の副画素形成部 Ps (l, l)〜Ps (3m , 2η)に共通的に設けられ画素電極 Epと共通電極 Ecとの間に挟持された液晶層と からなる。なお、上記信号線、 TFT、およびそれに接続された画素電極 Epを含む基 板を TFT基板と!/ 、、上記共通電極 Ecおよび図示されな!、カラーフィルタや各種光 学補償フィルム (偏光板等)を含む基板を CF基板という。そして、画素電極 Epと共通 電極 Ecとそれらの間に挟持された液晶層とにより形成される液晶容量 Clcが、副画 素データに相当する電圧を保持するための画素容量を構成する。なお、通常、画素 容量に確実に電圧を保持すベぐ液晶容量 Clcに並列に補助容量が設けられるが、 補助容量は本発明には直接に関係しないのでその説明および図示を省略する。 As shown in FIG. 2, each sub-pixel forming portion Ps (i, j) has a source terminal connected to the data signal line Ls that passes through the corresponding intersection and a scanning signal that passes through the corresponding intersection. Thin film transistor with gate terminal connected to line Lg (hereinafter referred to as `` TFT 10), the pixel electrode Ep connected to the drain terminal of the TFT 10, and the 3 m X 2n sub-pixel forming portions Ps (l, l) to Ps (3m, 2n) in common The common electrode (also referred to as “counter electrode”) Ec provided and the pixel electrode Ep provided in common to the 3m × 2n sub-pixel formation portions Ps (l, l) to Ps (3m, 2η) And a liquid crystal layer sandwiched between the common electrode Ec. Note that the substrate including the signal line, TFT, and pixel electrode Ep connected to the TFT substrate! /, The common electrode Ec and not shown !, color filters, various optical compensation films (polarizing plates, etc. ) Is a CF substrate. The liquid crystal capacitance Clc formed by the pixel electrode Ep, the common electrode Ec, and the liquid crystal layer sandwiched between them constitutes a pixel capacitance for holding a voltage corresponding to sub-pixel data. In general, an auxiliary capacitor is provided in parallel with the liquid crystal capacitor Clc, which should surely hold the voltage in the pixel capacitor. However, since the auxiliary capacitor is not directly related to the present invention, its description and illustration are omitted.
[0045] 上記構成力 わ力るように、 V、ずれかの走査信号線 Lgに印加される走査信号 G (i) がアクティブになると、その走査信号線 Lgが選択されて、その走査信号線 Lgに接続 される(各副画素形成部 Ps (i, j)の) TFT10が導通状態となり、その TFT10に接続 される画素電極 Epには、データ信号 D (j)がデータ信号線 Lsを介して印加される (j = l〜2n)。これにより、その印加されたデータ信号 D (j)の電圧(共通電極 Ecの電位 を基準とする電圧)が、その画素電極 Epを含む副画素形成部 Ps (i, j)に副画素デー タとして書き込まれる。 [0045] As described above, when the scanning signal G (i) applied to the scanning signal line Lg, which is V or shifted, becomes active, the scanning signal line Lg is selected, and the scanning signal line The TFT 10 connected to Lg (of each sub-pixel forming portion Ps (i, j)) becomes conductive, and the data signal D (j) passes through the data signal line Ls to the pixel electrode Ep connected to the TFT 10. Applied (j = l to 2n). As a result, the voltage of the applied data signal D (j) (voltage based on the potential of the common electrode Ec) is transferred to the subpixel formation portion Ps (i, j) including the pixel electrode Ep. Written as
[0046] 図 3は、上記のような液晶パネル 600の構造を模式的に示す断面図である。液晶パ ネル 600は、 1対の透明の絶縁性基板である TFT基板 66および CF基板 56と、それ ら TFT基板 66と CF基板 56との間に挟持された液晶層 60とを備え、 TFT基板 66の 後方(図 3における下方)に配置されるバックライトからの光の透過率を上記画像デー タ Dvl, Dv2に応じて変化させることにより、視点(アイポイント)が配置されるべき前 方(図 3における上方)に対して、上記画像データ Dvl, Dv2の表す画像を表示する FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the structure of the liquid crystal panel 600 as described above. The liquid crystal panel 600 includes a pair of transparent insulating substrates, a TFT substrate 66 and a CF substrate 56, and a liquid crystal layer 60 sandwiched between the TFT substrate 66 and the CF substrate 56. By changing the transmittance of light from the backlight arranged behind 66 (below in Fig. 3) according to the image data Dvl and Dv2, the viewpoint (eyepoint) should be placed in front ( Display the image represented by the above image data Dvl and Dv2
[0047] 液晶パネル 600における TFT基板 66および CF基板 56の外面(液晶層 60の配置 される側の反対側の主面)には偏光板 68, 55がそれぞれ貼付されている。 TFT基 板 66の内面 (液晶層 60の配置される側の主面)には、上記のデータ信号線 Lsおよ
び走査信号線 Lgと各副画素形成部 Ps (l, l)〜Ps (3m, 2n)の TFT10および画素 電極 Epとを含む TFT回路部 64が形成され、 CF基板 56の内面には、 R副画素、 G 副画素および B副画素の図 1に示す配置に対応するように構成されたカラーフィルタ 58が形成され、そのカラーフィルタ 58を覆うように透明の共通電極 59が形成されて いる。これに加えて本実施形態では、 CF基板 56の外側に透明の視差バリア基板 52 が配置され、この視差バリア基板 52の内面には、視差バリア 54bを含む視差バリア層 54が遮光性の金属または榭脂等によって形成されている。この視差バリア層 54は、 スリット 54sを有しており、ノ ックライトから TFT基板 66、液晶層 60および CF基板 56 等を通過して前方に向かう光を選択的に遮断することで、 TFT回路部 64、液晶層 6 0およびカラーフィルタ 58等によって実現される上記副画素形成部 Ps (l, l)〜Ps (3 m, 2n)により形成される画像に対して視差を生じさせる。すなわち、この視差バリア 層 54は、少なくとも 2つの視点に対して異なる画像が表示されるように、上記副画素 形成部 Ps (l, l)〜Ps (3m, 2n)により形成される画像に視差を生じさせる視差生成 部として機能する。 Polarizing plates 68 and 55 are attached to the outer surfaces of the TFT substrate 66 and the CF substrate 56 in the liquid crystal panel 600 (the main surface opposite to the side where the liquid crystal layer 60 is disposed), respectively. On the inner surface of the TFT substrate 66 (the main surface on the side where the liquid crystal layer 60 is disposed), the data signal lines Ls and And the scanning signal line Lg, the TFT circuit section 64 including the TFT 10 of each of the sub-pixel forming sections Ps (l, l) to Ps (3m, 2n) and the pixel electrode Ep, are formed on the inner surface of the CF substrate 56. A color filter 58 configured to correspond to the arrangement shown in FIG. 1 of the subpixel, the G subpixel, and the B subpixel is formed, and a transparent common electrode 59 is formed so as to cover the color filter 58. In addition to this, in the present embodiment, a transparent parallax barrier substrate 52 is disposed outside the CF substrate 56, and the parallax barrier layer 54 including the parallax barrier 54b is formed on the inner surface of the parallax barrier substrate 52 with a light-shielding metal or It is formed from greaves. The parallax barrier layer 54 has a slit 54s, and selectively blocks light that passes through the TFT substrate 66, the liquid crystal layer 60, the CF substrate 56, and the like from the knock light and moves forward. 64, a parallax is generated for an image formed by the sub-pixel forming portions Ps (l, l) to Ps (3 m, 2n) realized by the liquid crystal layer 60, the color filter 58, and the like. That is, the parallax barrier layer 54 has a parallax on the image formed by the sub-pixel forming portions Ps (l, l) to Ps (3m, 2n) so that different images are displayed for at least two viewpoints. It functions as a parallax generator that generates
図 4は、上記のような液晶パネル 600の構成を模式的に示しており、図 4 (A)は、デ ユアルビユ一表示(以下「DV表示」と略記する)のための構成を示す平面図であり、 図 4 (B)は、 DV表示のための構成を示す断面図であって、図 4 (A)の X—X線にお ける断面図に相当する。以下、図 4 (A)および図 4 (B)を参照して、本実施形態にお いて DV表示を実現するための構成および作用を説明する。なお以下では、 TFT回 路部 64、液晶層 60およびカラーフィルタ 58等によって実現される上記副画素形成 部 Ps (l, l)〜Ps (3m, 2n)のそれぞれを区別せずに言及する場合には、参照符号 "70"で示すものとし、副画素形成部を単に「副画素」ともいう。また、各副画素 70に 付された符号" Xy" (X=R, G, B; y=l, r)は、その副画素 70が R副画素、 G副画 素、 B副画素のいずれであるか、および、画像データ Dvlの表す左画像と画像デー タ Dvlの表す右画像の!/、ずれの画像を形成するための副画素であるかを示して!/、る 。すなわち、例えば" R1"の付された副画素 70は、左画像を形成するための R副画素 であり、 "Gr"の付された副画素 70は、右画像を形成するための G副画素である。な お以下では、符号" Xy"の付された副画素 70を「Xy副画素」と呼ぶものとする。
[0049] 図 4 (A)および図 4 (B)に示すように、各副画素 70は、その長手方向が行方向(走 查信号線 Lgの延びる方向)となるように配置されており、上記副画素形成部 Ps (l, 1 )〜Ps (3m, 2n)にお 、て、各列を構成する副画素 70は左画像または右画像の ヽ ずれか一方を形成するための副画素のみからなる。そして、左画像を形成するため の副画素のみからなる列と、右画像を形成するための副画素のみ力 なる列と力 交 互に配置されている。視差バリア層 54は、スリット 54sが各副画素 70の長手方向に垂 直な方向すなわち列方向(データ信号線 Lsの延びる方向)に延び、かつ、副画素 70 の 2列毎に 1つのスリット 54sが形成されると共に、右画像を形成するための副画素 Xr の右側部分および左画像を形成するための副画素 XIの左側部分が、スリット 54sに よって部分的に露出するように構成されている (X=R, G, B)。 FIG. 4 schematically shows the configuration of the liquid crystal panel 600 as described above. FIG. 4A is a plan view showing the configuration for a dual-view display (hereinafter abbreviated as “DV display”). FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration for DV display, and corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along line XX in FIG. 4A. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 4 (A) and FIG. 4 (B), the configuration and operation for realizing DV display in the present embodiment will be described. In the following, when referring to each of the sub-pixel forming portions Ps (l, l) to Ps (3m, 2n) realized by the TFT circuit portion 64, the liquid crystal layer 60, the color filter 58, etc. without distinction. Is denoted by reference numeral “70”, and the sub-pixel forming portion is also simply referred to as “sub-pixel”. Further, the sign “Xy” (X = R, G, B; y = l, r) attached to each subpixel 70 indicates that the subpixel 70 is any of the R subpixel, the G subpixel, and the B subpixel. Of the left image represented by the image data Dvl and the right image represented by the image data Dvl! /, Indicating whether it is a sub-pixel for forming a shifted image! /, Ru. That is, for example, the subpixel 70 with “R1” is an R subpixel for forming the left image, and the subpixel 70 with “Gr” is the G subpixel for forming the right image. It is. In the following, the sub-pixel 70 labeled “Xy” is referred to as “Xy sub-pixel”. [0049] As shown in FIG. 4 (A) and FIG. 4 (B), each sub-pixel 70 is arranged such that its longitudinal direction is the row direction (direction in which the scanning signal line Lg extends), In the sub-pixel forming portions Ps (l, 1) to Ps (3m, 2n), the sub-pixels 70 constituting each column are only sub-pixels for forming one of the left image and the right image. Consists of. Then, a column composed of only sub-pixels for forming the left image and a column composed of only the sub-pixels for forming the right image are alternately arranged. The parallax barrier layer 54 has slits 54 s extending in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of each sub-pixel 70, that is, the column direction (direction in which the data signal line Ls extends), and one slit 54 s for every two columns of the sub-pixel 70. The right side portion of the sub-pixel Xr for forming the right image and the left side portion of the sub-pixel XI for forming the left image are configured to be partially exposed by the slit 54s. (X = R, G, B).
[0050] 視差バリア層 54を上記のような構成とし、スリット 54sの幅 wlおよび視差バリア 54b と副画素 70との間隔 dlを適切に設定することにより、図 4 (B)に示すように、表示画 面に向力つて左側の所定領域 DLからは、 XI副画素 (X=R、 G、 B)から形成される 左画像のみが見え、表示画面に向力つて右側の所定領域 DRからは、 Xr副画素 (X =R、 G、 B)から形成される右画像のみが見えるようになる。すなわち、視点の配置 可能な第 1の所定領域 DLに対しては画像データ Dvlの表す左画像のみが表示され 、視点の配置可能な第 2の所定領域 DRに対しては画像データ Dv2の表す右画像の みが表示される。なお、視差バリア 54bと副画素 70との間隔 dlは、図 3に示すカラー フィルタ 58と視差バリア 54bとの距離に相当する。 [0050] By configuring the parallax barrier layer 54 as described above and appropriately setting the width wl of the slit 54s and the distance dl between the parallax barrier 54b and the sub-pixel 70, as shown in FIG. Only the left image formed from the XI sub-pixels (X = R, G, B) can be seen from the left predetermined area DL, directed toward the display screen, and from the right predetermined area DR, directed toward the display screen. Only the right image formed from Xr sub-pixels (X = R, G, B) becomes visible. That is, only the left image represented by the image data Dvl is displayed for the first predetermined area DL where the viewpoint can be arranged, and the right represented by the image data Dv2 for the second predetermined area DR where the viewpoint can be arranged. Only the image is displayed. Note that the distance dl between the parallax barrier 54b and the sub-pixel 70 corresponds to the distance between the color filter 58 and the parallax barrier 54b shown in FIG.
[0051] 上記のような構成において、視点の配置される領域によっては、表示画面に向かつ て左側の領域において左画像のみならず右画像も見えたり、表示画面に向力つて右 側の領域において左画像のみならず右画像も見えたりすることがある。すなわち、左 右画像の映り込みが生じることがある。しかし本実施形態では、各副画素 70はその 長手方向が行方向となるように配置されており (横長画素配置構成)、視差バリア層 5 4におけるスリット 54sは各副画素の長手方向に垂直な方向に延びているので、視差 ノリア 54bと副画素 70との間隔 dlを大きくしても、各副画素 90の長手方向に平行に スリット 84sが延びる図 30の従来構成に比べ、左右画像の映り込みが生じにくい。し たがって、上記構成によれば、高い加工精度を必要することなく左右画像の映り込み
を防止することができる。例えば、図 30に示したような縦長画素配置構成の場合、視 差バリア 84bと副画素 90との距離 d2は 50 μ程度であるのに対して CF基板 56として ガラスの厚みは 700 程度であることから、従来の DV液晶パネルの作製の際には、 ガラス基板に対する研磨等の特殊な加工が必要となる。これに対して本実施形態に おける上記構成によれば、従来ほど高い加工高精度を必要としないことに加えて、そ のような特殊な作業が不要また軽減されるので、製造コストを抑制することができる。 [0051] In the configuration as described above, depending on the region where the viewpoint is arranged, not only the left image but also the right image can be seen in the left region facing the display screen, or the right region can be urged toward the display screen. In this case, not only the left image but also the right image may be seen. In other words, left and right images may be reflected. However, in this embodiment, each subpixel 70 is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is the row direction (horizontal pixel arrangement configuration), and the slit 54s in the parallax barrier layer 54 is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of each subpixel. Since the slit 84s extends in parallel to the longitudinal direction of each subpixel 90 even if the distance dl between the parallax nolia 54b and the subpixel 70 is increased, the left and right images are projected. It is hard to produce. Therefore, according to the above configuration, the left and right images are reflected without requiring high processing accuracy. Can be prevented. For example, in the case of a vertically long pixel arrangement as shown in FIG. 30, the distance d2 between the viewing barrier 84b and the subpixel 90 is about 50 μ, whereas the thickness of the glass as the CF substrate 56 is about 700. For this reason, special processing such as polishing of the glass substrate is required when manufacturing a conventional DV liquid crystal panel. On the other hand, according to the above-described configuration in the present embodiment, in addition to not requiring high machining accuracy as high as conventional, such special work is unnecessary and reduced, so that the manufacturing cost is suppressed. be able to.
[0052] < 1. 3 データドライバの構成例 > [0052] <1. 3 Data driver configuration example>
本実施形態におけるような横長画素配置構成の場合、表示すべきカラー画像の 1 画素を形成するための 3つの副画素形成部(R副画素、 G副画素および Β副画素)は 列方向に配置されるので(図 1)、同一解像度の表示を得るには、従来の縦長画素配 置構成(図 30)に比べて 3倍の数の走査信号線 Lgが必要となる。しかし本実施形態 では、図 1に示すように、上記 3つの副画素形成部は同一のデータ信号線 Lsに接続 されるので、データ信号線 Lsの数を従来の縦長画素配置構成の場合の 1Z3とする ことができる。本実施形態におけるデータドライバ 300は、このような液晶パネル 600 の構成に応じて DV表示 (デュアルビュー表示)を可能にするようにデータ信号 D (1) 〜D (2n)を生成する必要がある。以下、このようなデータドライバ 300の構成例につ いて説明する。 In the case of a horizontally long pixel arrangement as in the present embodiment, three sub-pixel forming portions (R sub-pixel, G sub-pixel and Β sub-pixel) for forming one pixel of a color image to be displayed are arranged in the column direction. Therefore, in order to obtain a display with the same resolution (Fig. 1), the number of scanning signal lines Lg is three times that of the conventional vertical pixel arrangement (Fig. 30). However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, since the three sub-pixel forming portions are connected to the same data signal line Ls, the number of data signal lines Ls is 1Z3 in the case of the conventional vertically long pixel arrangement configuration. It can be. The data driver 300 in this embodiment needs to generate data signals D (1) to D (2n) so as to enable DV display (dual view display) according to the configuration of the liquid crystal panel 600. . Hereinafter, a configuration example of such a data driver 300 will be described.
[0053] 図 5 (A)および図 5 (B)は、データドライバ 300に供給すべきデジタル画像信号の 表す入力データのフォーマットを示して 、る。図 1に示した本実施形態の構成では、 図 5 (A)に示すように、左画像データ DaLと右画像データ DaRとが画像データ Dvl, Dv2として同時に表示制御回路 200に供給され、画像データ Dv 1の表す左画像の 信号であるデジタル画像信号 DV1と画像データ Dv2の表す右画像の信号であるデ ジタル画像信号 DV2とが同時にデータドライバ 300に入力される(以下、この入力形 式を「DV2系統同時入力形式」という)。これに対し、図 5 (B)に示すように、左画像デ ータ DaLと右画像データ DaRとを行方向(水平方向)に並べた形式の画像データ( 以下「結合画像データ」 t 、う)を想定し、この結合画像データの表す画像の信号が データドライバ 300に入力されるという形式も考えられる(以下、この入力形式を「DV 表示マッピング入力形式」という)。この結合画像データは、 m行 2 X 3n列のマトリクス
形式に配列された 2 X 3 X m X n個の副画素データ力 なる画像データであって、各 行の前半は左画像を表す副画素データからなり後半は右画像を表す副画素データ からなる。 DV表示マッピング入力形では、このような 2 X 3 X m X n個の副画素データ が順次、 1系統のデジタル画像信号 DVとしてデータドライバ 300に入力される。なお 、左画像データ DaLと右画像データ DaRとを同一内容のデータとした場合には、入 力形式が DV2系統同時入力形式か DV表示マッピング入力形式かに拘わらず、 DV 表示ではない通常の表示が行われる(表示画面前方のいずれの視点に対しても同 一の画像が表示される)。 FIGS. 5A and 5B show the format of input data represented by a digital image signal to be supplied to the data driver 300. FIG. In the configuration of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. 5A, the left image data DaL and the right image data DaR are simultaneously supplied to the display control circuit 200 as image data Dvl and Dv2, and the image data The digital image signal DV1 which is the signal of the left image represented by Dv 1 and the digital image signal DV2 which is the signal of the right image represented by image data Dv2 are simultaneously input to the data driver 300 (hereinafter this input format is referred to as “ DV2 simultaneous input format ”). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5B, image data in a format in which the left image data DaL and the right image data DaR are arranged in the row direction (horizontal direction) (hereinafter referred to as “combined image data” t, ), And an image signal represented by the combined image data may be input to the data driver 300 (hereinafter, this input format is referred to as “DV display mapping input format”). This combined image data is a matrix of m rows 2 X 3n columns 2 x 3 x m x n sub-pixel data power image data arranged in a format, where the first half of each row consists of sub-pixel data representing the left image and the second half consists of sub-pixel data representing the right image . In the DV display mapping input type, such 2 × 3 × m × n sub-pixel data are sequentially input to the data driver 300 as one digital image signal DV. When the left image data DaL and the right image data DaR are data with the same contents, the normal display that is not DV display is used regardless of whether the input format is DV2 simultaneous input format or DV display mapping input format. (The same image is displayed for any viewpoint in front of the display screen).
[0054] 図 6は、上記の DV2系統同時入力形式と DV表示マッピング入力形式の双方に対 応できるデータドライバ 300の構成例を示すブロック図である。 FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data driver 300 that can support both the DV2 system simultaneous input format and the DV display mapping input format.
[0055] 図 6に示すようにデータドライバ 300は、第 1の接続切換回路としての入力側セレク タ 302と、直並列変換器として機能する 6個のラインメモリ、すなわち左画像赤色用ラ インメモリ 304R1、左画像緑色用ラインメモリ 304G1、左画像青色用ラインメモリ 304B 1、右画像赤色用ラインメモリ 304Rr、右画像緑色用ラインメモリ 304Grおよび右画像 青色用ラインメモリ 304Brと、 1表示行分の副画素データを示す信号を保持するため の保持手段としてのラッチ回路 306と、第 2の接続切換回路としての出力側セレクタ 3 08と、 DZA変換回路 310と、出力バッファ 312とを備えている。そして、左画像を表 すデジタル画像信号 DV1は、左画像用の赤色入力信号 R— Lin、緑色入力信号 G —Linおよび青色用入力信号 B— Linとして、右画像を表すデジタル画像信号 DV1 は、右画像の赤色入力信号 R— Rin、緑色入力信号 G—Rinおよび青色用入力信号 B— Rinとして、それぞれ、表示制御回路 200から入力側セレクタ 302に入力される。 また、入力形式を選択するための制御信号として入力側選択制御信号 Saが表示制 御回路 200から入力側セレクタ 302の与えられ、出力信号を時分割的に切り替える ための制御信号として出力側選択制御信号 Sb, Scが表示制御回路 200から出力側 セレクタ 308の与えられる。さらに、ラッチ回路 306には、ラッチストローブ信号 LSが 表示制御回路 200から与えられ、 DZA変換回路 310には、図示しない基準電圧発 生回路力も複数の基準電圧が与えられる。なお、入力側選択制御信号 Saは、上記ラ インメモ U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Brにも与えられ、それらラ
インメモリのィネーブル信号を兼ねて 、る。 [0055] As shown in FIG. 6, the data driver 300 includes an input side selector 302 as a first connection switching circuit and six line memories functioning as a serial-parallel converter, that is, a left image red line memory. 304R1, left line green line memory 304G1, left line blue line memory 304B 1, right line red line memory 304Rr, right line green line memory 304Gr and right line blue line memory 304Br, and sub-line for one display line A latch circuit 306 as a holding means for holding a signal indicating pixel data, an output side selector 308 as a second connection switching circuit, a DZA conversion circuit 310, and an output buffer 312 are provided. The digital image signal DV1 representing the left image is the red input signal R—Lin for the left image, the green input signal G—Lin, and the blue input signal B—Lin. The red input signal R—Rin, the green input signal G—Rin, and the blue input signal B—Rin for the right image are input from the display control circuit 200 to the input side selector 302, respectively. In addition, the input side selection control signal Sa is given from the display control circuit 200 to the input side selector 302 as a control signal for selecting the input format, and the output side selection control is used as a control signal for switching the output signal in a time division manner. Signals Sb and Sc are supplied from the display control circuit 200 to the output side selector 308. Further, the latch strobe signal LS is supplied from the display control circuit 200 to the latch circuit 306, and a plurality of reference voltages are supplied to the DZA conversion circuit 310 as well as a reference voltage generating circuit power (not shown). The input side selection control signal Sa is also given to the above line memos U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br. Also serves as an in-memory enable signal.
[0056] 上記構成例では入力側セレクタ 302は、左画像を表すデジタル画像信号 DV1を構 成する入力信号 R— Lin, G— Lin, B— Linをそれぞれ入力するための第 1の入力 端子群 Al, Bl, C1と、右画像を表すデジタル画像信号 DV2を構成する入力信号 R — Rin, G— Rin, B— Rinをそれぞれ入力するための第 2の入力端子群 Dl, El, F 1と、左画像用のラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1に画像信号をそれぞれ出力す るための第 1の出力端子群 1Y1, 1Y2, 1Y3と、右画像用のラインメモリ 304Rr, 30 4Gr, 304Brに画像信号をそれぞれ出力するための第 2の出力端子群 1Y4, 1Y5, 1Y6とを有している。 [0056] In the above configuration example, the input-side selector 302 includes the first input terminal group for inputting the input signals R—Lin, G—Lin, and B—Lin that constitute the digital image signal DV1 representing the left image. Al, Bl, C1 and the second input terminal group Dl, El, F1 for inputting the input signals R — Rin, G— Rin, B— Rin that constitute the digital image signal DV2 representing the right image, respectively , The first output terminal group 1Y1, 1Y2, 1Y3 for outputting image signals to the line memory 304R1, 304G1, 304B1 for the left image and the image signals to the line memories 304Rr, 30 4Gr, 304Br for the right image, respectively. The second output terminal groups 1Y4, 1Y5, and 1Y6 are respectively provided for outputting.
[0057] 図 7 (A)は、この入力側セレクタ 302の動作を示す真理値表を示している。この図 7 FIG. 7A shows a truth table showing the operation of the input side selector 302. This figure 7
(A)に示すように、入力側選択制御信号 Saが" 0"のときに、入力側セレクタ 302は、 第 1および第 2の入力端子群 A1〜F1にそれぞれ与えられる画像信号をそのまま第 1 および第 2の出力端子群 1Y1〜1Y6からそれぞれ出力する。一方、入力側選択制 御信号 Saが" 1"のときには、入力側セレクタ 302は、第 1の入力端子群 A1〜C1にそ れぞれ与えられる画像信号を第 2の出力端子群 1Y4〜: LY6からそれぞれ出力し、第 2の入力端子群 D1〜F1は使用されない。なお、図 7 (A)において、 "X"は出力され る信号が不定または無効であることを示して 、る。 As shown in (A), when the input side selection control signal Sa is “0”, the input side selector 302 uses the first and second input terminal groups A1 to F1 as the first image signals as they are. And output from the second output terminal group 1Y1 to 1Y6. On the other hand, when the input-side selection control signal Sa is “1”, the input-side selector 302 sends the image signals given to the first input terminal groups A1 to C1 to the second output terminal groups 1Y4 to: The second input terminal group D1 to F1 is not used. In Fig. 7 (A), "X" indicates that the output signal is indefinite or invalid.
[0058] 上記より、入力側セレクタ 302は、左画像および右画像を表す信号を DV2系統同 時入力形式で受け取る場合 (以下、このときの動作モードを「2系統同時入力モード」 という)には、図 8 (B)に示すような入力側選択制御信号 Saを与えられ、左画像およ び右画像を表す信号を DV表示マッピング形式で受け取る場合 (以下、このときの動 作モードを「表示マッピング入力モード」という)には、図 8 (C)に示すような入力側選 択制御信号 Saを与えられる。本実施形態では、図 1からわ力るように入力側セレクタ 302は、 2系統同時入力モードで動作するので、図 8 (B)に示すような入力側選択制 御信号 Saを表示制御回路 200から与えられる。 [0058] From the above, when the input side selector 302 receives a signal representing the left image and the right image in the DV2 system simultaneous input format (hereinafter, the operation mode at this time is referred to as "two systems simultaneous input mode"). When the input side selection control signal Sa as shown in Fig. 8 (B) is given and signals representing the left image and the right image are received in the DV display mapping format (hereinafter, the operation mode at this time is displayed as `` Display In the “mapping input mode”, an input side selection control signal Sa as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the input-side selector 302 operates in the two-system simultaneous input mode, and therefore, the input-side selection control signal Sa as shown in FIG. Given by.
[0059] 出力側セレクタ 308は、 2n個のブロック力もなり(2nはデータ信号線 Lsの数)、各ブ ロックは 3つの副画素データに相当するデジタル信号 A2, B2, C2を受け取り、図 7 ( B)に示す真理値表に従って、それらの信号 A2, B2, C2のいずれかを選択してデジ
タル信号 Yとして出力する。したがって、出力側セレクタ 308は、図 9 (B)に示すような 出力側選択制御信号 Sb, Scを与えられると、ラッチ回路 306から入力されるデジタ ル画像信号を、図 9 (C)に示すように出力側選択制御信号 Sb, Scの切り替えに応じ て時分割的に出力する。この時分割出力のための出力側選択制御信号 Sb, Scの切 り替え順序は、図 1および図 4に示す横長画素配置構成に対応している。また、この 出力側選択制御信号 Sb, Scの切り替えは、各水平走査期間の 1Z3の期間毎に行 われ、その切り替えのタイミングは、図 9 (D)〜図 9 (F)に示すようにゲートドライノ O 0による走査信号線 Lgの選択に同期している。 [0059] The output side selector 308 has 2n block power (2n is the number of data signal lines Ls), and each block receives digital signals A2, B2, and C2 corresponding to three sub-pixel data. According to the truth table shown in (B), select one of those signals A2, B2, C2 Output as the Y signal. Therefore, when the output-side selector 308 receives the output-side selection control signals Sb and Sc as shown in FIG. 9B, the digital image signal input from the latch circuit 306 is shown in FIG. 9C. In this way, the output side selection control signals Sb and Sc are output in a time-sharing manner according to switching. The switching order of the output side selection control signals Sb and Sc for the time division output corresponds to the horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration shown in FIGS. The output side selection control signals Sb and Sc are switched every 1Z3 period of each horizontal scanning period, and the switching timing is gated as shown in FIGS. 9 (D) to 9 (F). This is synchronized with the selection of the scanning signal line Lg by the dryino O 0.
[0060] < 1. 4 データドライバの動作例 1 > [0060] <1. 4 Data Driver Operation Example 1>
以下、上記構成例によるデータドライバ 300の 2系統同時入力モードでの動作を、 図 10〜図 11に示すタイミングチャートを参照して説明する。 2系統同時入力モードの 場合、入力側セレクタ 302には、図 10 (A)に示す入力側選択制御信号 Saが与えら れると共に、左画像および右画像を表す 2系統のデジタル画像信号 DV1, DV2が、 図 10 (C)に示すデジタル画像信号 R— Lin, G— Lin, B— Lin, R— Rin, G— Rin, B— Rinとして、副画素単位でシリアルに入力される。入力側セレクタ 302は、これら の制御信号および画像信号の入力に対して、図 10 (D)に示すように、上記デジタル 画像信号 R— Lin, G— Lin, B— Lin, R— Rin, G— Rin, B— Rinを出力端子群 1Y 1〜: LY6力らそれぞれ出力して、ラインメモ U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304 Gr, 304Brにそれぞれ供給する。なお、図 10 (C)および図 10 (D)は、表示すべき画 像 (左画像および右画像)の 2行目に相当するデジタル画像信号が入力側セレクタ 3 02に入力された時点の入力側および出力側の信号を示しており、この時点では、ラ インメモ U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Brは、表示すべき画像の 1 行目に相当するデジタル画像信号を保持して 、る。 Hereinafter, the operation of the data driver 300 according to the above configuration example in the two-system simultaneous input mode will be described with reference to timing charts shown in FIGS. In the two-system simultaneous input mode, the input-side selector 302 is supplied with the input-side selection control signal Sa shown in FIG. 10 (A) and two digital image signals DV1, DV2 representing the left image and the right image. Are inputted serially in units of sub-pixels as digital image signals R—Lin, G—Lin, B—Lin, R—Rin, G—Rin, B—Rin shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10 (D), the input side selector 302 receives the digital image signal R—Lin, G—Lin, B—Lin, R—Rin, G as shown in FIG. — Rin, B— Rin is output terminal group 1Y 1 ~: LY6 force is output and supplied to line memo U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304 Gr, 304Br, respectively. FIGS. 10C and 10D show the input when the digital image signal corresponding to the second line of the image to be displayed (the left image and the right image) is input to the input side selector 302. The line memo U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br holds the digital image signal corresponding to the first line of the image to be displayed. .
[0061] ラインメモ U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Brは、このようにしてそ れぞれ副画素単位でシリアルに入力したデジタル画像信号 R— Lin, G— Lin, B_L in, R— Rin, G— Rin, B— Rinを、表示すべき画像の 1行分ずつパラレルに出力す る。すなわち、 3個のラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1は、左画像を表すデジタル 画像信号を画素単位でシリアルに入力し当該左画像の 1行分ずつパラレルに出力
する第 1の直並列変換器として機能し、他の 3個のラインメモリ 304Rr, 304Gr, 304 Brは、右画像を表すデジタル画像信号を画素単位でシリアルに入力し当該右画像 の 1行分ずつパラレルに出力する第 2の直並列変 として機能する。 [0061] Line memos U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br are digital image signals R-Lin, G-Lin, B_Lin, R- Rin, G—Rin, B—Rin are output in parallel for each line of the image to be displayed. In other words, the three line memories 304R1, 304G1, and 304B1 input digital image signals representing the left image serially in units of pixels and output them in parallel for each row of the left image. The other three line memories 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br input the digital image signal representing the right image serially in pixel units, one line at a time for the right image. It functions as the second series-parallel variable that outputs in parallel.
[0062] 上記ラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Brとラッチ回路 30 6とは、図 6に示すように、左画像の画素を形成する 3つの副画素形成部(R副画素、 G副画素および B副画素)が取り込むべきデータに相当する信号 xRy—L, xGy_L , xBy— Lと、右画像の画素を形成する 3つの副画素形成部(R副画素、 G副画素お よび B副画素)が取り込むべきデータに相当する信号 xRy—R, xGy_R, xBy— Rと 力 Sラッチ回路 306の入力側において交互に並ぶように、信号配線で接続されている( x= l〜m, y= l〜n)。これにより、ラッチ回路 306は、上記ラインメモリ 304R1, 304 Gl, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br力らノ ラレノレに出力される 1行分のデジタノレ画 像信号を受け取り、図 10 (E)に示すラッチストローブ信号 LSに基づきラッチして、図 10 (F)および図 10 (G)に示すように当該 1行分のデジタル画像信号を出力する(図 10 (F)および図 10 (G)は、出力側セレクタ 308のブロック I, IIに対してそれぞれ出力 されるデジタル画像信号を示している)。ここでラッチ回路 306は、 1水平走査期間の 間、すなわち表示すべき画像の 1画素を形成するための 3つの副画素形成部 (R副 画素、 G副画素、 B副画素)に接続される 3本の走査信号線である同一画素走査信 号線群の!/ヽずれかが選択されて!ヽる間、上記 1行分のデジタル画像信号を保持し出 力する。 [0062] The line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br and the latch circuit 306, as shown in FIG. 6, include three sub-pixel forming units (R sub-pixel, The signals xRy—L, xGy_L, xBy—L corresponding to the data to be captured by the G subpixel and B subpixel) and the three subpixel forming portions (R subpixel, G subpixel and The signals corresponding to the data to be captured by the B sub-pixel) are connected by signal wiring so that they are alternately arranged on the input side of the S latch circuit 306, xRy—R, xGy_R, xBy—R , y = l to n). As a result, the latch circuit 306 receives the digital image signal for one line output from the line memories 304R1, 304 Gl, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br to the normal output, and the latch shown in FIG. Latching based on the strobe signal LS, the digital image signal for one row is output as shown in Fig. 10 (F) and Fig. 10 (G) (Fig. 10 (F) and Fig. 10 (G) are output) This shows the digital image signal output to each of the blocks I and II of the side selector 308). Here, the latch circuit 306 is connected to three sub-pixel forming portions (R sub-pixel, G sub-pixel, and B sub-pixel) for forming one pixel of an image to be displayed during one horizontal scanning period. Of the same pixel scanning signal line group which is three scanning signal lines! / While the screen is selected, the digital image signal for the above line is held and output as long as it is read.
[0063] 出力側セレクタ 308には、上記のようにラッチ回路 306から 1行分のデジタル画像 信号が入力されると共に(図 11 (D)および図 11 (E) )、図 11 (C)に示す出力側選択 制御信号 Sb, Scが与えられる。ここで出力側選択制御信号 Sb, Scの値 (信号 Sbの 値と信号 Scの値との組み合わせ)は、各水平走査期間において 1Z3水平走査期間 毎に切り替わる。これにより出力側セレクタ 308は、表示すべき画像 (左画像および 右画像)の 1行における各画素を形成する 3つの副画素形成部(R副画素、 G副画素 および B副画素)が取り込むべきデータに相当する信号 (以下「同一画素信号群」と いう) xRy_Z, xGy_Z, xBy_Zを 1/3水平走査期間ずつ順次に出力する (x= 1 〜m;y= l〜n;Z=L, R)。すなわち、その同一画素信号群 (を構成する信号)を、
図 11 (F)および図 11 (G)に示すように 1水平走査期間(1H期間)において時分割で 信号 Yとして出力する(図 11 (F)および図 11 (G)は、出力側セレクタ 308のブロック I , IIからそれぞれ出力されるデジタル画像信号を示している)。なお、この時分割出力 における順序は、図 1および図 4に示す横長画素配置構成に対応している。また、出 力側選択制御信号 Sb, Scは、ゲートドライバ 400による走査信号線 Lgの選択に同 期して切り替わるので、出力側セレクタ 308は、液晶パネル 600における走査信号線 Lgの順次的な選択に連動して、出力信号を同一画素信号群の間で切り替えることに なる。 [0063] As described above, a digital image signal for one row is input from the latch circuit 306 to the output-side selector 308 (FIGS. 11D and 11E), and FIG. Output side selection control signals Sb and Sc shown in FIG. Here, the values of the output side selection control signals Sb, Sc (a combination of the value of the signal Sb and the value of the signal Sc) are switched every 1Z3 horizontal scanning period in each horizontal scanning period. As a result, the output-side selector 308 should capture the three sub-pixel forming portions (R sub-pixel, G sub-pixel and B sub-pixel) that form each pixel in one row of the image to be displayed (left image and right image). Signals corresponding to data (hereinafter referred to as “same pixel signal group”) xRy_Z, xGy_Z, xBy_Z are sequentially output every 1/3 horizontal scanning period (x = 1 to m; y = l to n; Z = L, R). That is, the same pixel signal group (the signal constituting) As shown in FIG. 11 (F) and FIG. 11 (G), the signal Y is output in a time division manner in one horizontal scanning period (1H period) (FIG. 11 (F) and FIG. 11 (G) are output side selectors). The digital image signals respectively output from the blocks I and II of FIG. The order in this time-division output corresponds to the horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration shown in FIGS. Further, since the output side selection control signals Sb and Sc are switched in synchronization with the selection of the scanning signal line Lg by the gate driver 400, the output side selector 308 performs the sequential selection of the scanning signal line Lg in the liquid crystal panel 600. In conjunction with this, the output signal is switched between the same pixel signal group.
[0064] 0 八変換回路310は、図示しない基準電圧発生回路から供給される複数の基準 電圧に基づき、出力側セレクタ 308 (の各ブロック)から出力される上記デジタル画像 信号 Yをアナログ電圧信号に変換する。これにより得られたアナログ電圧信号は、ィ ンピーダンス変換手段としての電圧ホロヮ等によって構成される出力バッファ 312を 介して、 1行分のデータ信号 D (1)〜D (2n)としてデータドライバ 300から図 11 (H) および図 11 (1)に示すように出力される。ここで、 DZA変換回路 310と出力バッファ 312は、出力側セレクタ 308からのデジタル画像信号 Yに基づきデータ信号 D (j)を 生成し出力する信号生成出力回路を構成する。また、この信号生成出力回路は、ラ ツチ回路 306及び出力側セレクタ 308と共にデータ信号について信号生成回路を構 成する。 The eight conversion circuit 310 converts the digital image signal Y output from the output side selector 308 (each block thereof) into an analog voltage signal based on a plurality of reference voltages supplied from a reference voltage generation circuit (not shown). Convert. The analog voltage signal thus obtained is output from the data driver 300 as data signals D (1) to D (2n) for one row via an output buffer 312 configured by a voltage hollow or the like as impedance conversion means. It is output as shown in Fig. 11 (H) and Fig. 11 (1). Here, the DZA conversion circuit 310 and the output buffer 312 constitute a signal generation output circuit that generates and outputs a data signal D (j) based on the digital image signal Y from the output side selector 308. In addition, the signal generation output circuit constitutes a signal generation circuit for the data signal together with the latch circuit 306 and the output side selector 308.
[0065] 以上のようにして、液晶ノネル 600〖こお!/、て、左画像の各画素を形成すべき副画 素形成部に接続されたデータ信号線 Lsには、同一画素信号群 xRy— L, xGy_L, xBy—Lにっき時分割でデータ信号が印加され、右画像の各画素を形成すべき副画 素形成部に接続されたデータ信号線 Lsには、同一画素信号群 xRy— R, xGy_R, xBy— Rにっき時分割でデータ信号が印加される(x= l〜m、 y= l〜n)。そして、ゲ ートドライバ 400から各走査信号線 Lgに走査信号 G (i) (i= l〜3m)が印加されるこ とにより、 3m本の走査信号線が順次選択される。選択された走査信号線 Lgに接続さ れる副画画素形成部 Ps (i, j)では、 TFT10が導通状態となり、当該副画素形成部 P s (i, j)に対応する交差点を通過するデータ信号線 Lsのデータ信号 D (j)が副画素デ ータとして取り込まれ、その副画素データに相当する電圧が画素容量 Clcに保持され
る。このようにして各副画素形成部 Ps (i, j)に取り込まれた副画素データに基づき液 晶層の光の透過率が制御され、視差生成部としての視差バリア層 54による働きと相 まって、デュアルビュー表示が実現される。 [0065] As described above, the liquid crystal non-channel 600 〖! /, And the data signal line Ls connected to the sub-pixel forming portion where each pixel of the left image is to be formed are connected to the same pixel signal group xRy. — L, xGy_L, xBy—L The data signal is applied in a time-sharing manner, and the same pixel signal group xRy—R is connected to the data signal line Ls connected to the sub-pixel forming part that should form each pixel of the right image. , xGy_R, xBy—A data signal is applied to R in a time-sharing manner (x = l to m, y = l to n). Then, when the scanning signal G (i) (i = 1 to 3 m) is applied from the gate driver 400 to each scanning signal line Lg, 3 m scanning signal lines are sequentially selected. In the sub-image pixel formation portion Ps (i, j) connected to the selected scanning signal line Lg, the TFT 10 becomes conductive, and the data passes through the intersection corresponding to the sub-pixel formation portion P s (i, j). The data signal D (j) of the signal line Ls is captured as subpixel data, and a voltage corresponding to the subpixel data is held in the pixel capacitor Clc. The In this way, the light transmittance of the liquid crystal layer is controlled based on the subpixel data taken into each subpixel formation portion Ps (i, j), and this is combined with the action of the parallax barrier layer 54 as the parallax generation portion. Thus, dual view display is realized.
[0066] < 1. 5 データドライバの動作例 2 > [0066] <1.5 Data Driver Operation Example 2>
次に、上記構成例によるデータドライバ 300が表示マッピング入力モードでの動作 を、図 12に示すタイミングチャートを参照して説明する。この場合、既述のように入力 側セレクタ 302には、図 12 (A)に示す入力側選択制御信号 Saが与えられると共に、 図 5 (B)に示すように左画像データ DaLと右画像データ DaRとを行方向に並べた形 式の結合画像データに対応する 1系統のデジタル画像信号 DVが、図 12 (B)に示す デジタル画像信号 R_Lin, G_Lin, B_Linとして入力端子群 Al, Bl, C1力ら畐 ij 画素単位でシリアルに入力される。このとき、各水平走査期間の前半では、左画像を 表すデジタル画像信号 xRy— L, xGy_L, xBy— L (x= l〜m、 y= l〜n)がデジタ ル画像信号 R— Lin, G— Lin, B— Linとして入力され、各水平走査期間の後半では 、右画像を表すデジタル画像信号 xRy— R, xGy_R, xBy— R (x= l〜m、 y= l〜 n)がデジタル画像信号 R— Lin, G— Lin, B— Linとして入力される。 Next, the operation of the data driver 300 according to the above configuration example in the display mapping input mode will be described with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. In this case, as described above, the input-side selector 302 is supplied with the input-side selection control signal Sa shown in FIG. 12 (A), and the left image data DaL and the right image data as shown in FIG. 5 (B). One digital image signal DV corresponding to combined image data in the form of DaR arranged in the row direction is input terminal group Al, Bl, C1 as digital image signals R_Lin, G_Lin, B_Lin shown in Fig. 12 (B) Power is input serially in ij pixel units. At this time, in the first half of each horizontal scanning period, digital image signals xRy—L, xGy_L, xBy—L (x = l to m, y = l to n) representing the left image are digital image signals R—Lin, G — Lin, B— Input as Lin and digital image signals xRy— R, xGy_R, xBy— R (x = l to m, y = l to n) representing the right image in the second half of each horizontal scanning period Input as signals R—Lin, G—Lin, B—Lin.
[0067] 入力側セレクタ 302は、これらの制御信号および画像信号の入力に対して、図 12 ( C)に示すように、各水平走査期間の前半では、左画像を表すデジタル画像信号 xR y_L, xGy_L, xBy— Lを第 1の出力端子群 1Y1〜: LY3からそれぞれ出力して、ラ インメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1にそれぞれ供給し、各水平走査期間の後半では、 右画像を表すデジタル画像信号 xRy— R, xGy_R, xBy— Rを第 2の出力端子群 1 Y4〜: LY6からそれぞれ出力して、ラインメモリ 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br〖こそれぞれ 供給する。これに対応して、ラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1は、各水平走査期間 の前半に入力側セレクタ 302から供給されるデジタル画像信号を取り込んで保持し、 ラインメモリ 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Brは、各水平走査期間の後半に入力側セレクタ 3 02から供給されるデジタル画像信号を取り込んで保持する。なお、図 12 (B)および 図 12 (C)は、表示すべき画像の 2行目に相当するデジタル画像信号が入力側セレク タ 302に入力された時点の入力側および出力側の信号を示しており、この時点では 、ラインメモ U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Brは、表示すべき画像
の 1行目に相当するデジタル画像信号を保持している。また、図 12において" X"は 無効または不定の信号値を示して 、る。 [0067] With respect to the input of these control signals and image signals, the input-side selector 302, as shown in FIG. 12C, in the first half of each horizontal scanning period, digital image signals xR y_L, xGy_L, xBy— L is output from the first output terminal group 1Y1 ~: LY3 is supplied to the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, respectively, and in the second half of each horizontal scanning period, digital image signals representing the right image xRy—R, xGy_R, xBy—R are output from the second output terminal group 1 Y4˜: LY6, respectively, and supplied to the line memories 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br. Correspondingly, the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1 capture and hold the digital image signal supplied from the input side selector 302 in the first half of each horizontal scanning period, and the line memories 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br In the second half of the scanning period, the digital image signal supplied from the input side selector 302 is captured and held. FIGS. 12B and 12C show the signals on the input side and the output side when the digital image signal corresponding to the second line of the image to be displayed is input to the input side selector 302. At this point, the line memo U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br is the image to be displayed Holds the digital image signal corresponding to the first line. In FIG. 12, “X” indicates an invalid or indefinite signal value.
[0068] このようにして左画像を表すデジタル画像信号 xRy—L, xGy_L, xBy— Lをそれ ぞれ畐 ij画素単位でシリアノレに人力したラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1、および、 右画像を表すデジタル画像信号 xRy— R, xGy_R, xBy— Rをそれぞれ副画素単 位でシリアルに入力したラインメモリ 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Brは、それらの画像信号 を、表示すべき画像の 1行分ずつパラレルに出力する。すなわち、既述の 2系統同時 入力モードの場合と同様、 3個のラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1は、左画像を表 すデジタル画像信号を画素単位でシリアルに入力し当該左画像の 1行分ずっパラレ ルに出力する第 1の直並列変^^として機能し、他の 3個のラインメモリ 304Rr, 304 Gr, 304Brは、右画像を表すデジタル画像信号を画素単位でシリアルに入力し当該 右画像の 1行分ずつパラレルに出力する第 2の直並列変 として機能する。したが つて、この表示マッピング入力モードにおいても、ラッチ回路 306は、上記ラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br力らノ ラレノレに出力される 1行分 のデジタル画像信号を受け取り、図 12 (D)に示すラッチストローブ信号 LSに基づき ラッチして、図 12 (E)および図 12 (F)に示すように当該 1行分のデジタル画像信号を 出力する。 [0068] In this way, the digital image signals xRy—L, xGy_L, and xBy—L representing the left image are line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, and the right image, each of which is ij pixel-powered. Digital image signals xRy— R, xGy_R, xBy— R are serially input in units of subpixels, and line memories 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br output these image signals in parallel for each row of the image to be displayed. To do. That is, as in the case of the two-line simultaneous input mode described above, the three line memories 304R1, 304G1, and 304B1 input digital image signals representing the left image serially in units of pixels and correspond to one row of the left image. The other three line memories 304Rr, 304 Gr, and 304Br function as the first series-parallel variable ^^ output to the parallel, and input the digital image signal representing the right image serially in pixel units. It functions as the second series-parallel variation that outputs the image one line at a time in parallel. Therefore, even in this display mapping input mode, the latch circuit 306 receives one line of digital image signals output from the line memory 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br force to the NORENORE. Based on the latch strobe signal LS shown in 12 (D), the digital image signal for one row is output as shown in FIGS. 12 (E) and 12 (F).
[0069] 出力側セレクタ 308、 DZ A変換回路 310および出力バッファ 312も、既述の 2系統 同時入力モードの場合と同様に動作し (図 11参照)、同様のデータ信号 D (1)〜D ( 2n)がデータドライバ 300から出力される。これにより、液晶ノネル 600において、左 画像の各画素を形成すべき副画素形成部に接続されたデータ信号線 Lsには、同一 画素信号群 xRy— L, xGy_L, xBy—Lにっき時分割でデータ信号が印加され、右 画像の各画素を形成すべき副画素形成部に接続されたデータ信号線 Lsには、同一 画素信号群 xRy— R, xGy_R, xBy—Rにっき時分割でデータ信号が印加される ( x= l〜m、 y= 1〜: n)。 [0069] The output side selector 308, the DZ A conversion circuit 310, and the output buffer 312 operate in the same manner as in the two-system simultaneous input mode described above (see FIG. 11), and the same data signal D (1) to D (2n) is output from the data driver 300. As a result, in the liquid crystal non-channel 600, the data signal line Ls connected to the sub-pixel forming portion where each pixel of the left image is to be formed is time-divided into the same pixel signal group xRy—L, xGy_L, xBy—L. The data signal is applied to the data signal line Ls connected to the sub-pixel forming part where each pixel of the right image is to be formed, and the data signal is applied to the same pixel signal group xRy—R, xGy_R, xBy—R in a time division manner. (X = l˜m, y = 1˜: n).
[0070] < 1. 6 効果 > [0070] <1. 6 Effect>
以上のように本実施形態によれば、従来の縦長画素配置構成に比べて高!、加工 精度を必要することなく左右画像の映り込みを防止することができる横長画素配置構
成が採用されていることから(図 1、図 4)、表示行数の 3倍の数の走査信号線が必要 となり、同一解像度の表示を得るには、従来の縦長画素配置構成(図 30)に比べて 3 倍の数の走査信号線 Lgが液晶パネル 600に設けられることになる。しかし本実施形 態では、上記 3つの副画素形成部は同一のデータ信号線 Lsに接続されている(図 1) 。そして、データドライバ 300から出力されるべき各データ信号 D (j) (j = l〜2n)が、 図 11 (C)に示す出力側選択制御信号 Sb, Scに基づき出力側セレクタ 308によって 1水平走査期間内で切り換えられる。これにより、左画像の各画素を形成すべき副画 素形成部に接続されたデータ信号線 Lsには、同一画素信号群 xRy— L, xGy_L, xBy—Lにっき時分割でデータ信号が印加され、右画像の各画素を形成すべき副画 素形成部に接続されたデータ信号線 Lsには、同一画素信号群 xRy— R, xGy_R, xBy— Rにっき時分割でデータ信号が印加される(x= l〜m、 y= l〜n) (図 11)。し たがって、同一解像度の表示を得るのに、従来の縦長画素配置構成(図 30)に比べ 、走査信号線 Lgの数が 3倍必要となるものの、データ信号線の数は 1Z3で済む。そ の結果、液晶パネル 600において、走査信号線 Lgの増大による開口率の低下を抑 ff¾することができる。 As described above, according to the present embodiment, the horizontal pixel arrangement configuration is higher than the conventional vertical pixel arrangement configuration and can prevent the left and right images from being reflected without requiring processing accuracy. As shown in Fig. 1 and Fig. 4, the number of scanning signal lines is three times as many as the number of display rows. To obtain a display with the same resolution, the conventional vertical pixel arrangement configuration (Fig. 30) is required. The number of scanning signal lines Lg is three times as large as that of the liquid crystal panel 600. However, in the present embodiment, the three sub-pixel forming portions are connected to the same data signal line Ls (FIG. 1). Then, each data signal D (j) (j = l to 2n) to be output from the data driver 300 is converted into one horizontal signal by the output side selector 308 based on the output side selection control signals Sb and Sc shown in FIG. It is switched within the scanning period. As a result, a data signal is applied to the data signal line Ls connected to the sub-pixel forming portion that should form each pixel of the left image in a time division manner for the same pixel signal group xRy—L, xGy_L, xBy—L. A data signal is applied to the same pixel signal group xRy—R, xGy_R, xBy—R in a time-sharing manner to the data signal line Ls connected to the sub-pixel forming portion that should form each pixel of the right image ( x = l ~ m, y = l ~ n) (Figure 11). Therefore, to obtain a display with the same resolution, the number of scanning signal lines Lg is three times that of the conventional vertically long pixel arrangement (FIG. 30), but the number of data signal lines is only 1Z3. As a result, in the liquid crystal panel 600, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the aperture ratio due to an increase in the scanning signal line Lg.
[0071] また上記のように、入力側セレクタ 302を備える図 6に示した構成のデータドライバ 3 00によれば、入力データの形式が DV2系統同時入力形式(図 5 ( A) )と DV表示マツ ビング入力形式(図 5 (B) )のいずれの場合であっても、開口率の低下を抑制すべく データ信号線数を減らした横長画素配置構成の DV表示用の液晶パネル 600 (のデ ータ信号線 Ls)を駆動することができる。 Further, as described above, according to the data driver 300 having the configuration shown in FIG. 6 including the input side selector 302, the input data format is the DV2 system simultaneous input format (FIG. 5 (A)) and the DV display. Regardless of the mapping input format (Fig. 5 (B)), the DV display LCD panel 600 (with a horizontal pixel arrangement with a reduced number of data signal lines to suppress a decrease in aperture ratio) Data signal line Ls) can be driven.
[0072] < 1. 7 変形例 > [0072] <1. 7 Modification>
図 6に示した構成のデータドライバ 300では、同一画素信号群についての時分割 出力のための出力側セレクタ 308は、 DZA変換回路 310の前段に配置されている 力 これに代えて、出力側セレクタ 308bをアナログスィッチ等で構成し、図 13に示す ように DZA変換回路 310の後段に配置するようにしてもよい。ただし、出力側セレク タ 308を DZA変換回路 310の前段に配置する構成は、 DZA変換回路の規模を低 減できると 、う利点を有して 、る。 In the data driver 300 having the configuration shown in FIG. 6, the output-side selector 308 for time-division output for the same pixel signal group is arranged in front of the DZA conversion circuit 310. Instead, the output-side selector The 308b may be constituted by an analog switch or the like, and may be arranged at the subsequent stage of the DZA conversion circuit 310 as shown in FIG. However, the configuration in which the output side selector 308 is arranged in front of the DZA conversion circuit 310 has the advantage that the scale of the DZA conversion circuit can be reduced.
[0073] また、図 6に示した構成のデータドライバ 300では、出力側セレクタ 308における各
ブロックは、同一画素信号群 A2, B2, C2のうちから選択された信号 Yを出力する端 子を 1つだけ有している力 これに代えて、図 14に示すように出力側セレクタ 308に おける各ブロックが 3つの出力端子から 3つの信号 Yl, Y2, Y3を出力する構成であ つてもよい。この場合、図 16 (F)および図 16 (G)に示すように、出力側セレクタ 308 における各ブロックの 3つの出力端子からの 3つの信号 Yl, Y2, Y3は同一の信号 であり、これに応じて、出力バッファ 312は、図 16 (H)および図 16 (1)に示すような 3 つの信号 Rj, Bj, Gjをデータ信号 D (j)として出力する (j = l〜2n)。そして、データド ライバ 300における 3個の出力端子が液晶パネル 600における 1本のデータ信号線 Lsに対応し、データ信号 D (j)としての 3つ信号 Rj, Gj, Bjは実質的に同一の信号で ある。したがって、それらの信号 Rj, Gj, Bjの出力される 3つの出力端子は、液晶パ ネル 600における 1本のデータ信号線 (j番目のデータ信号線) Lsに接続される。その 結果、液晶パネル 600におけるデータ信号線 Lsとデータドライバ 300との接続に冗 長性を持たせることで信頼度を向上させることが可能となる。 [0073] Further, in the data driver 300 having the configuration shown in FIG. The block has only one terminal that outputs a signal Y selected from the same pixel signal group A2, B2, and C2. Instead, the block has an output selector 308 as shown in FIG. Each block may output three signals Yl, Y2, Y3 from three output terminals. In this case, as shown in Fig. 16 (F) and Fig. 16 (G), the three signals Yl, Y2, Y3 from the three output terminals of each block in the output side selector 308 are the same signal. In response, the output buffer 312 outputs three signals Rj, Bj, Gj as shown in FIG. 16 (H) and FIG. 16 (1) as the data signal D (j) (j = 1 to 2n). The three output terminals in the data driver 300 correspond to one data signal line Ls in the liquid crystal panel 600, and the three signals Rj, Gj, Bj as the data signal D (j) are substantially the same signal. It is. Therefore, the three output terminals from which the signals Rj, Gj, and Bj are output are connected to one data signal line (jth data signal line) Ls in the liquid crystal panel 600. As a result, it is possible to improve reliability by providing redundancy in the connection between the data signal line Ls and the data driver 300 in the liquid crystal panel 600.
[0074] また、図 14および図 15に示す構成を採用した場合には、出力側選択制御信号 Sb , Scを (Sb, Sc) = (l, 1)に固定的に設定することにより、データドライバは、同一画 素信号群に相当するデータ信号を独立に (並列に)信号 Rj, Bj, Gj (j = l〜2n)とし て出力する(図 7 (A)、図 15)。そして、入力側セレクタ 302を、第 1の入力端子群 A1 〜C1から入力されるデジタル画像信号を出力すべき端子群が第 1の出力端子群 1Y 1〜: LY3と第 2の出力端子群 1Y4〜: LY6との間で画素単位で切り替わるような構成と することにより、データドライバ 300は、縦長画素配置構成の通常の SV液晶表示装 置におけるデータドライバとしても使用可能となる(この場合、入力側セレクタ 302の 第 2の入力端子群 D1〜F1は使用されない)。 Further, when the configurations shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 are adopted, the output side selection control signals Sb and Sc are fixedly set to (Sb, Sc) = (l, 1), so that the data The driver outputs data signals corresponding to the same pixel signal group independently (in parallel) as signals Rj, Bj, Gj (j = l to 2n) (Fig. 7 (A), Fig. 15). Then, the input side selector 302 is connected to the first output terminal group 1Y1 to: LY3 and the second output terminal group 1Y4 to which the digital image signals input from the first input terminal groups A1 to C1 are to be output. ~: By switching to LY6 in pixel units, the data driver 300 can also be used as a data driver in a normal SV liquid crystal display device with a vertically long pixel arrangement (in this case, input The second input terminal group D1 to F1 of the side selector 302 is not used).
[0075] 上記実施形態では、視差生成部としての視差バリア層 54が液晶パネル 600の前面 側に配置された構成、すなわち前方視差バリア方式が採用されているが(図 3)、これ に代えて、後方視差バリア方式 (例えば特許文献 1の図 4参照)を採用してもよい。 In the above embodiment, a configuration in which the parallax barrier layer 54 as a parallax generation unit is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal panel 600, that is, a front parallax barrier method is adopted (FIG. 3). Alternatively, a rear parallax barrier method (see, for example, FIG. 4 of Patent Document 1) may be employed.
[0076] 上記実施形態に係る液晶表示装置は、例えば各種駆動回路等の全部または一部 を画素回路とともにガラス基板に一体的に形成したいわゆるドライバ(フル)モノリシッ ク型または部分的ドライバモノリシック型の液晶表示装置であってもよい。また、上記
実施形態では、画素電極と対向電極とが異なる基板上に形成された液晶パネルを例 に説明したが、これらの電極構造に限定はなぐ例えば、 IPSOn Plane Switching)方 式のような、同一基板上に画素電極と対向電極とが形成されているものであってもよ い。さらに、本発明は、液晶表示装置に限定されるものではなぐ液晶表示装置以外 のアクティブマトリクス型の DV表示装置にも適用可能である。 The liquid crystal display device according to the above embodiment is a so-called driver (full) monolithic type or partial driver monolithic type in which all or part of various drive circuits and the like are integrally formed on a glass substrate together with a pixel circuit. It may be a liquid crystal display device. Also, above In the embodiment, the liquid crystal panel in which the pixel electrode and the counter electrode are formed on different substrates has been described as an example. However, these electrode structures are not limited to the same substrate, for example, the IPS On Plane Switching) method. Further, a pixel electrode and a counter electrode may be formed. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but can be applied to an active matrix type DV display device other than a liquid crystal display device.
[0077] なお、上記実施形態として、 2人の使用者に異なる画像を表示する DV表示装置が 例に挙げられているが、これと同様の原理に基づき 1人の使用者に対し両眼視差を 生じさせて立体的な表示を行う表示装置にも本発明は適用可能である。また、 DV表 示装置以外の表示装置であっても、横長画素配置構成であって列方向に隣接する R副画素、 G副画素、 B副画素でカラー画像の 1画素が形成される場合であれば、本 発明の適用が可能である。 In the above embodiment, a DV display device that displays different images for two users is taken as an example, but binocular parallax is given to one user based on the same principle. The present invention is also applicable to a display device that generates a three-dimensional display by generating the above. In addition, even in a display device other than a DV display device, when a pixel of a color image is formed by an R subpixel, a G subpixel, and a B subpixel which are in a horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration and are adjacent in the column direction. If so, the present invention can be applied.
[0078] < 2.第 2の実施形態 > [0078] <2. Second Embodiment>
次に、上記第 1の実施形態に係る横長画素配置構成の DV液晶表示装置(図 1)の みならず、縦長画素配置構成の DV液晶表示装置(図 30)や SV液晶表示装置にお いても使用可能なデータドライバを、本発明の第 2の実施形態として説明する。すな わち、本実施形態に係るデータドライバは、 DV液晶表示装置の液晶パネル (以下「 DV液晶パネル」と 、う)の駆動用として使用可能であるだけでなく、 SV液晶表示装 置の液晶パネル (以下「SV液晶パネル」という)の駆動用としても使用可能である。ま た以下では、「左画像」および「右画像」という表現は、上記第 1の実施形態と同様、 D V液晶パネルの駆動を想定した場合においてその DV液晶表示パネルで表示すベ き 2つの画像を意味するものとする。そして以下では、 DV液晶パネルを駆動する場 合において、「2系統同時入力モード」および「表示マッピング入力モード」という表現 も上記第 1の実施形態と同様の意味で使用し、 SV液晶パネルを駆動する場合にお ける入力形式 (DV表示でな 、通常の表示が行われる場合の一般的な入力形式)で 画像信号をデータドライバが受け取るときの動作モードを「ノーマル表示モード」とい うものとする。ただし以下では、説明の便宜のために、「2系統同時入力モード」を「同 時入力モード」とも 、 、、「表示マッピング入力モード」を「交互入力モード」とも 、う。 Next, not only the DV liquid crystal display device with the horizontally long pixel arrangement according to the first embodiment (FIG. 1) but also the DV liquid crystal display device with the vertically long pixel arrangement (FIG. 30) and the SV liquid crystal display device. A data driver that can also be used will be described as a second embodiment of the present invention. That is, the data driver according to this embodiment can be used not only for driving a liquid crystal panel of a DV liquid crystal display device (hereinafter referred to as “DV liquid crystal panel”), but also for an SV liquid crystal display device. It can also be used to drive a liquid crystal panel (hereinafter referred to as “SV liquid crystal panel”). In the following, the expressions “left image” and “right image” are the two images that should be displayed on the DV liquid crystal display panel when driving the DV liquid crystal panel, as in the first embodiment. Means. In the following, when driving a DV LCD panel, the expressions “two-line simultaneous input mode” and “display mapping input mode” are also used in the same meaning as in the first embodiment, and the SV LCD panel is driven. The operation mode when the data driver receives the image signal in the input format (general input format for normal display, not DV display) is called `` normal display mode '' . However, in the following, for convenience of explanation, “two-system simultaneous input mode” is referred to as “simultaneous input mode”, and “display mapping input mode” is referred to as “alternate input mode”.
[0079] < 2. 1 データドライバの構成 >
図 17は、本実施形態に係るデータドライバの構成を示すブロック図である。このデ ータドライバは、上記第 1の実施形態におけるデータドライバ 300の構成例として図 1 4に示した構成と基本的には同様であるので、同一または対応する部分に同一の参 照符号を付すものとする。また以下では、本実施形態に係るデータドライバが使用さ れるべき液晶表示装置における他の構成要素や信号等についても、例えば「表示制 御回路 200」や「デジタル画像信号 DV1や DV2」というように、上記第 1の実施形態 と同様の参照符号が付されているものとして説明する。 [0079] <2.1 Data driver configuration> FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the data driver according to this embodiment. This data driver is basically the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 14 as the configuration example of the data driver 300 in the first embodiment, and therefore, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same or corresponding parts. And In the following, other components and signals in the liquid crystal display device to which the data driver according to the present embodiment should be used are also referred to as “display control circuit 200” or “digital image signal DV1 or DV2,” for example. In the following description, it is assumed that the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment are given.
[0080] 図 17に示すように本実施形態に係るデータドライバは、第 1の接続切換回路として の入力側セレクタ 302と、直並列変 として機能する 6個のラインメモリ、すなわち 左画像赤色用ラインメモリ 304R1、左画像緑色用ラインメモリ 304G1、左画像青色用 ラインメモリ 304B1、右画像赤色用ラインメモリ 304Rr、右画像緑色用ラインメモリ 304 Grおよび右画像青色用ラインメモリ 304Brと、 1表示行分の副画素データを示す信 号を保持するための保持手段としてのラッチ回路 306と、第 2の接続切換回路として の出力側セレクタ 308と、 0 八変換回路310と、出力バッファ 312とを備えている。 そして、左画像を表すデジタル画像信号 DV1は、左画像用の赤色入力信号 R— Lin 、緑色入力信号 G— Linおよび青色用入力信号 B— Linとして、右画像を表すデジタ ル画像信号 DV1は、右画像の赤色入力信号 R— Rin、緑色入力信号 G— Rinおよ び青色用入力信号 B— Rinとして、それぞれ、表示制御回路 200から入力側セレクタ 302に入力される。また、入力形式を選択するための制御信号として入力側選択制 御信号 SI, S2が表示制御回路 200から入力側セレクタ 302に与えられ、出力信号 の時分割的な切り替えを可能とするための制御信号として出力側選択制御信号 S3, S4が表示制御回路 200から出力側セレクタ 308の与えられる。さらに、ラッチ回路 30 6には、ラッチストローブ信号 LSが表示制御回路 200から与えられ、 DZA変換回路 310には、図示しない基準電圧発生回路力 複数の基準電圧が与えられる。なお、 入力側選択制御信号 SI, S2は、上記ラインメモ U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br〖こも与えられ、それらラインメモリのィネーブル信号を兼ねている。 As shown in FIG. 17, the data driver according to the present embodiment includes an input-side selector 302 as a first connection switching circuit and six line memories functioning as a series-parallel shift, that is, a left image red line. Memory 304R1, left image green line memory 304G1, left image blue line memory 304B1, right image red line memory 304Rr, right image green line memory 304 Gr, and right image blue line memory 304Br, and one display line A latch circuit 306 as a holding means for holding a signal indicating sub-pixel data, an output side selector 308 as a second connection switching circuit, an eight-eight conversion circuit 310, and an output buffer 312 are provided. . The digital image signal DV1 representing the left image is a red input signal R-Lin for the left image, a green input signal G-Lin, and a blue input signal B-Lin, and the digital image signal DV1 representing the right image is The red input signal R—Rin, green input signal G—Rin, and blue input signal B—Rin of the right image are input from the display control circuit 200 to the input side selector 302, respectively. In addition, the input side selection control signals SI and S2 are given from the display control circuit 200 to the input side selector 302 as control signals for selecting the input format, and control for enabling time-division switching of the output signals is possible. Output side selection control signals S3 and S4 are given from the display control circuit 200 to the output side selector 308 as signals. Further, the latch strobe signal LS is supplied from the display control circuit 200 to the latch circuit 306, and a plurality of reference voltages (not shown) are supplied to the DZA conversion circuit 310. The input side selection control signals SI and S2 are also provided with the above line memos U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br, and also serve as enable signals for these line memories.
[0081] 上記構成例では入力側セレクタ 302は、左画像を表すデジタル画像信号 DV1を構 成する入力信号 R— Lin, G— Lin, B— Linをそれぞれ入力するための第 1の入力
端子群 Al, Bl, CIと、右画像を表すデジタル画像信号 DV2を構成する入力信号 R — Rin, G— Rin, B— Rinをそれぞれ入力するための第 2の入力端子群 Dl, El, F 1と、左画像用のラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1に画像信号をそれぞれ出力す るための第 1の出力端子群 1Y1, 1Y2, 1Y3と、右画像用のラインメモリ 304Rr, 30 4Gr, 304Brに画像信号をそれぞれ出力するための第 2の出力端子群 1Y4, 1Y5, 1Y6とを有している。 [0081] In the above configuration example, the input-side selector 302 is a first input for inputting the input signals R—Lin, G—Lin, and B—Lin that constitute the digital image signal DV1 representing the left image. Terminal group Al, Bl, CI and second input terminal group Dl, El, F for inputting the input signals R — Rin, G— Rin, B— Rin that constitute the digital image signal DV2 representing the right image, respectively 1 and the first output terminal group 1Y1, 1Y2, 1Y3 for outputting image signals to the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1 for the left image and the line memories 304Rr, 30 4Gr, 304Br for the right image, respectively. A second output terminal group 1Y4, 1Y5, 1Y6 for outputting image signals is provided.
[0082] 図 18 (A)は、この入力側セレクタ 302の動作を示す真理値表を示している。この図 18 (A)に示すように、入力側選択制御信号 SI, S2が(SI, S2) = (0, 0)のときに、 入力側セレクタ 302は、第 1および第 2の入力端子群 A1〜F1にそれぞれ与えられる 画像信号をそのまま第 1および第 2の出力端子群 1Y1〜1Y6からそれぞれ出力する 。また、入力側選択制御信号 SI, S2が(SI, S2) = (0, 1)のときには、入力側セレ クタ 302は、第 1の入力端子群 A1〜C1にそれぞれ与えられる画像信号を第 2の出 力端子群 1Y4〜1Y6からそれぞれ出力し、第 2の入力端子群 D1〜F1は使用されな い。なお、図 18 (A)において、 "X"は出力される信号が不定または無効であることを 示している。 FIG. 18A shows a truth table showing the operation of the input side selector 302. As shown in FIG. 18 (A), when the input side selection control signals SI and S2 are (SI, S2) = (0, 0), the input side selector 302 is connected to the first and second input terminal groups. The image signals given to A1 to F1 are output as they are from the first and second output terminal groups 1Y1 to 1Y6, respectively. When the input side selection control signals SI and S2 are (SI, S2) = (0, 1), the input side selector 302 receives the second image signals given to the first input terminal groups A1 to C1, respectively. Output terminal group 1Y4 to 1Y6, and the second input terminal group D1 to F1 are not used. In FIG. 18 (A), “X” indicates that the output signal is indefinite or invalid.
[0083] 図 30に示したような縦長画素配置構成の DV液晶パネルを駆動する場合にぉ ヽて 、入力側セレクタ 302は、左画像および右画像を表す信号を DV2系統同時入力形 式(図 5 (A) )で受け取る 2系統同時入力モードで動作するときには、図 19 (B)に示 す入力側選択制御信号 SI, S2を与えられ、左画像および右画像を表す信号を DV 表示マッピング形式(図 5 (B) )で受け取る表示マッピング入力モードで動作するとき には、図 19 (C)に示す入力側選択制御信号 SI, S2を与えられる。また、図 1および 図 4に示したような横長画素配置構成の DV液晶表示パネルを駆動する場合には、 図 19 (D)に示す入力側選択制御信号 SI, S2を与えられる。さらに、 SV表示パネル を駆動する場合 (ノーマル表示モードの場合)には、図 19 (E)に示す入力側選択制 御信号 SI, S2を与えられる。 In the case of driving a DV liquid crystal panel having a vertically long pixel arrangement configuration as shown in FIG. 30, the input-side selector 302 receives a signal representing the left image and the right image in a DV2 system simultaneous input format (see FIG. 30). 5 (A)) When operating in the 2-system simultaneous input mode, the input side selection control signals SI and S2 shown in Fig. 19 (B) are given, and the signals representing the left and right images are displayed in DV display mapping format. When operating in the display mapping input mode received in (Fig. 5 (B)), input side selection control signals SI and S2 shown in Fig. 19 (C) are given. Further, when driving a DV liquid crystal display panel having a horizontally long pixel arrangement as shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, the input side selection control signals SI and S2 shown in FIG. 19D are given. Furthermore, when the SV display panel is driven (in the normal display mode), the input side selection control signals SI and S2 shown in Fig. 19 (E) are given.
[0084] 出力側セレクタ 308は、 2n個のブロック力もなり(2nはデータ信号線 Lsの数)、各ブ ロックは 3つの入力端子と 3つの出力端子を有している。そして各ブロックは、 3つの 副画素データに相当するデジタル信号 A2, B2, C2を受け取り、図 18 (B)に示す真
理値表に従って、当該 3つの出力端子のそれぞれ力 出力すべき信号をそれらの信 号 A2, B2, C2の中力 選択し、当該 3つの出力端子力 デジタル信号 Yl, Y2, Y 3として出力する。 The output side selector 308 also has 2n blocking power (2n is the number of data signal lines Ls), and each block has three input terminals and three output terminals. Each block receives the digital signals A2, B2, and C2 corresponding to the three subpixel data, and the true signals shown in FIG. According to the reasoning table, select the medium power of the signals A2, B2, and C2 for the signals to be output from the three output terminals, and output the three output terminal forces as digital signals Yl, Y2, and Y3. .
[0085] 縦長画素配置構成の液晶パネル駆動する場合には(DV液晶パネルと SV液晶パ ネルのいずれを駆動する場合にも)、出力側セレクタ 308は、図 20 (C)〜図 20 (E) に示すように各ブロックから 3つの信号 Yl, Y2, Y3が独立に出力されるように、図 2 0 (B)に示す出力側選択制御信号 S3, S4を与えられる(以下、このように各ブロック 力も 3つの信号 Yl, Y2, Y3が独立に出力される動作モードを「独立出力モード」と いう)。一方、横長画素配置構成の液晶パネル駆動する場合には (DV液晶パネルと SV液晶パネルのいずれを駆動する場合にも)、出力側セレクタ 308は、図 21 (C)〜 図 21 (E)に示すように各ブロックから出力される信号 Yl, Y2, Y3が同一であって上 記 3つの信号 A2, B2, C2の間で順次切り替えられるように、すなわち当該 3つの信 号 A2, B2, C2が 1水平走査期間内で時分割的に出力されるように、図 21 (B)に示 す出力側選択制御信号 S3, S4を与えられる(以下、このように各ブロックから出力さ れる信号 Yl, Y2, Y3が同一であって上記 3つの信号 A2, B2, C2の間で順次切り 替えられる動作モードを「時分割出力モード」と ヽぅ)。 [0085] When driving a liquid crystal panel with a vertically long pixel arrangement (whether to drive either a DV liquid crystal panel or an SV liquid crystal panel), the output side selector 308 includes the output side selector 308 shown in FIGS. ), The output side selection control signals S3 and S4 shown in Fig. 20 (B) are given so that the three signals Yl, Y2 and Y3 are output independently from each block. The operation mode in which three signals Yl, Y2, and Y3 are output independently for each block force is called “independent output mode”). On the other hand, in the case of driving a liquid crystal panel with a horizontally long pixel arrangement (either when driving a DV liquid crystal panel or an SV liquid crystal panel), the output side selector 308 is shown in FIGS. 21 (C) to 21 (E). As shown in the figure, the signals Yl, Y2, Y3 output from each block are the same and can be switched sequentially between the three signals A2, B2, C2, that is, the three signals A2, B2, C2 Output side selection control signals S3 and S4 shown in Fig. 21 (B) are given so that the signals are output in a time-sharing manner within one horizontal scanning period (hereinafter, signals Yl output from each block in this way). , Y2 and Y3 are the same, and the operation mode that can be switched sequentially between the above three signals A2, B2, and C2 is called “time division output mode”.
[0086] 図 17からわ力るように、独立出力モードの場合には、データドライバからデータ信 号として信号 Rj, Bj, Gj (j = l〜2n)が独立に出力される。一方、時分割出力モード の場合には、各 3つの信号 Rj, Bj, Gjは同一のデータ信号 D (j)としてデータドライバ 力 出力され、かつ、各データ信号 D (j)は上記 3つの信号 A2, B2, C2の時分割出 力に相当する信号となっている。なお、出力側選択制御信号 S3, S4の切り替えは、 図 21 (B)に示すように各水平走査期間の 1Z3の期間毎に行われ、その切り替えの タイミングは、ゲートドライバ 400による走査信号線 Lgの選択に同期している。 As shown in FIG. 17, in the independent output mode, signals Rj, Bj, Gj (j = 1 to 2n) are independently output as data signals from the data driver. On the other hand, in the time-division output mode, each of the three signals Rj, Bj, Gj is output as the same data signal D (j), and each data signal D (j) is the above three signals. This signal corresponds to the time-division output of A2, B2, and C2. The output side selection control signals S3 and S4 are switched every 1Z3 period of each horizontal scanning period as shown in FIG. 21B, and the timing of the switching is the scanning signal line Lg by the gate driver 400. Is synchronized with the selection.
[0087] 上記ラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Brとラッチ回路 30 6との間の信号配線による接続は、図 17を図 6と比較すればわ力るように、第 1の実 施形態とは異なっている。すなわち本実施形態では、 DV液晶パネルにおける図 30 に示す縦長画素配置構成に対応すベぐ左画像の画素を形成する副画素形成部( R副画素、 G副画素、 B副画素のいずれか)が取り込むべきデータに相当する信号 (X
Ry_L, xGy_L, xBy— Lのいずれ力 と、右画像の画素を形成する副画素形成部 (R副画素、 G副画素、 B副画素のいずれか)が取り込むべきデータに相当する信号( xRy_R, xGy_R, xBy—Rのいずれ力)とがラッチ回路 306の入力側において交 互に並ぶように接続される構成となって 、る。 [0087] The connection by signal wiring between the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br and the latch circuit 30 6 is as follows. It is different from the embodiment. That is, in this embodiment, a sub-pixel forming unit (any one of the R sub-pixel, G sub-pixel, and B sub-pixel) that forms the left image pixel corresponding to the vertically long pixel arrangement configuration shown in FIG. 30 in the DV liquid crystal panel. Signal corresponding to the data to be captured (X Ry_L, xGy_L, xBy— The signal corresponding to the data (xRy_R, xBy—L) and the data to be taken in by the subpixel formation unit (R subpixel, G subpixel, or B subpixel) that forms the pixel of the right image xGy_R and xBy—R) are connected so that they are alternately arranged on the input side of the latch circuit 306.
[0088] 以下、本実施形態に係るデータドライバの各種モードにおける動作を説明する。 Hereinafter, operations in various modes of the data driver according to the present embodiment will be described.
< 2. 2 データドライバの動作例 1 > <2.2 Data driver operation example 1>
まず、縦長画素配置構成の DV液晶パネル(図 30)を駆動する場合における(2系 統)同時入力モードでの動作を、図 22〜図 23に示すタイミングチャートを参照して説 明する。この場合、入力側セレクタ 302には、図 22 (A)に示す入力側選択制御信号 SI, S2が与えられると共に、左画像および右画像を表す 2系統のデジタル画像信号 DV1, DV2が、図 22 (B)に示すデジタル画像信号 R— Lin, G— Lin, B— Lin, R_ Rin, G— Rin, B— Rinとして、副画素単位でシリアルに入力される。入力側セレクタ 302は、これらの制御信号および画像信号の入力に対して、図 22 (C)に示すように、 上記デジタル画像信号 R— Lin, G— Lin, B— Lin, R— Rin, G— Rin, B— Rinを出 力端子群 1Y1〜: LY6力もそれぞれ出力して、ラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 3 04Rr, 304Gr, 304Brにそれぞれ供給する。なお、図 22 (B)および図 22 (C)は、 表示すべき画像 (左画像および右画像)の 2行目に相当するデジタル画像信号が入 力側セレクタ 302に入力された時点の入力側および出力側の信号を示しており、こ の時点では、ラインメモ U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Brは、表示 すべき画像の 1行目に相当するデジタル画像信号を保持して 、る。 First, the operation in the (two-system) simultaneous input mode when driving a DV liquid crystal panel (Fig. 30) with a vertically long pixel arrangement will be described with reference to the timing charts shown in Figs. In this case, the input-side selector 302 is provided with the input-side selection control signals SI and S2 shown in FIG. 22 (A), and two digital image signals DV1 and DV2 representing the left image and the right image are shown in FIG. Digital image signals R-Lin, G-Lin, B-Lin, R_Rin, G-Rin, B-Rin shown in (B) are serially input in units of sub-pixels. As shown in FIG. 22 (C), the input side selector 302 receives the control signal and the image signal as shown in FIG. 22C. The digital image signal R—Lin, G—Lin, B—Lin, R—Rin, G — Rin, B— Rin is output terminal group 1Y1 ~: LY6 force is also output and supplied to line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br, respectively. 22B and 22C show the input side when the digital image signal corresponding to the second line of the image to be displayed (the left image and the right image) is input to the input side selector 302. At this time, the line memo U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br holds the digital image signal corresponding to the first line of the image to be displayed. .
[0089] ラインメモ U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Brは、このようにしてそ れぞれ副画素単位でシリアルに入力したデジタル画像信号 R— Lin, G— Lin, B_L in, R— Rin, G— Rin, B— Rinを、表示すべき画像の 1行分ずつパラレルに出力す る。すなわち、 3個のラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1は、左画像を表すデジタル 画像信号を画素単位でシリアルに入力し当該左画像の 1行分ずつパラレルに出力 する第 1の直並列変換器として機能し、他の 3個のラインメモリ 304Rr, 304Gr, 304 Brは、右画像を表すデジタル画像信号を画素単位でシリアルに入力し当該右画像 の 1行分ずつパラレルに出力する第 2の直並列変 として機能する。
[0090] 上記ラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Brとラッチ回路 30 6とは、既述のように図 17に示す如く接続されている。このため、ラッチ回路 306は、 上記ラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br力らノラレノレに出 力される左画像および右画像の 1行分のデジタル画像信号を受け取り、図 22 (D)に 示すラッチストローブ信号 LSに基づきラッチして、図 22 (E)および図 22 (F)に示すよ うに左画像および右画像の当該 1行分のデジタル画像信号を副画素単位で (空間的 に)交互に出力する。なお、図 22 (E)および図 22 (F)は、出力側セレクタ 308のブロ ック I, IIに対してラッチ回路 306からそれぞれ入力すべきデジタル画像信号を示して いる。ラッチ回路 306は、このようにして出力側セレクタ 308の各ブロックに入力すベ き 3つのデジタル画像信号を、 1水平走査期間の間保持し信号 A2, B2, C2として出 力する。 [0089] The line memos U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br are digital image signals R-Lin, G-Lin, B_Lin, R- Rin, G—Rin, B—Rin are output in parallel for each line of the image to be displayed. That is, the three line memories 304R1, 304G1, and 304B1 function as a first serial / parallel converter that serially inputs a digital image signal representing the left image in units of pixels and outputs the left image in parallel for each row. The other three line memories 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304 Br input the digital image signal representing the right image serially in pixel units and output the right image in parallel for each row of the right image. Function as. The line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br and the latch circuit 306 are connected as shown in FIG. 17 as described above. For this reason, the latch circuit 306 receives the digital image signals for one line of the left image and the right image output from the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br force to the NORENORE, and FIG. Latch strobe signal LS shown in Fig. 22 (E) and Fig. 22 (F). To) alternately. 22E and 22F show digital image signals to be input from the latch circuit 306 to the blocks I and II of the output side selector 308, respectively. In this way, the latch circuit 306 holds the three digital image signals to be input to each block of the output side selector 308 for one horizontal scanning period and outputs them as signals A2, B2, and C2.
[0091] 出力側セレクタ 308には、上記のようにラッチ回路 306から左右画像の 1行分のデ ジタル画像信号が入力されると共に(図 23 (D)および図 23 (E) )、図 23 (C)に示す 出力側選択制御信号 S3, S4が与えられる。これにより、ラッチ回路 306の各ブロック 力 入力される信号 A2, B2, C2は、そのまま信号 Yl, Y2, Y3として出力され、 D ZA変換回路 310に入力される。 The output side selector 308 receives the digital image signal for one row of the left and right images from the latch circuit 306 as described above (FIGS. 23D and 23E) and FIG. Output side selection control signals S3 and S4 shown in (C) are given. As a result, the signals A2, B2, and C2 input to the respective blocks of the latch circuit 306 are output as signals Yl, Y2, and Y3 as they are and input to the D ZA conversion circuit 310.
[0092] 0 八変換回路310は、図示しない基準電圧発生回路から供給される複数の基準 電圧に基づき、出力側セレクタ 308 (の各ブロック)から出力される上記デジタル画像 信号 Yをアナログ電圧信号に変換する。これにより左右画像の 1行分の画像信号とし てのアナログ電圧信号が得られ、これらのアナログ電圧信号は、インピーダンス変換 手段としての電圧ホロヮ等によって構成される出力バッファ 312を介して、副画素単 位で交互に並ぶデータ信号 Rj, Bj, 0 = 1〜211)として図2301)ぉょび図23 (1) に示すように出力される。したがって、このようなデータ信号を縦長画素配置構成の D V液晶パネル(図 30)のデータ信号線に印加することにより当該 DV液晶パネルを駆 動することができる。 The eight conversion circuit 310 converts the digital image signal Y output from the output side selector 308 (each block) into an analog voltage signal based on a plurality of reference voltages supplied from a reference voltage generation circuit (not shown). Convert. As a result, an analog voltage signal is obtained as an image signal for one row of the left and right images, and these analog voltage signals are output from the sub-pixel unit via an output buffer 312 constituted by a voltage hollow or the like as impedance conversion means. As shown in FIG. 2301) and FIG. 23 (1), the data signals Rj, Bj, 0 = 1 to 211) are arranged alternately. Therefore, the DV liquid crystal panel can be driven by applying such a data signal to the data signal line of the DV liquid crystal panel (FIG. 30) having a vertically long pixel arrangement configuration.
[0093] < 2. 3 データドライバの動作例 2> [0093] <2.3 Data driver operation example 2>
次に、縦長画素配置構成の DV液晶パネル(図 30)を駆動する場合における表示 マッピング入力モード(交互入力モード)での動作を、図 24および図 23に示すタイミ
ングチャートを参照して説明する。この場合、入力側セレクタ 302には、図 24 (A)に 示す入力側選択制御信号 SI, S2が与えられると共に、図 5 (B)に示すように左画像 データ DaLと右画像データ DaRとを行方向に並べた形式の結合画像データに対応 する 1系統のデジタル画像信号 DVが、図 24 (B)に示すデジタル画像信号 R— Lin, G— Lin, B— Linとして入力端子群 Al, Bl, C1から副画素単位でシリアルに入力さ れる。このとき、各水平走査期間の前半では、左画像を表すデジタル画像信号 xRy — L, xGy_L, 8 —1^ = 1〜!11、 = 1〜11)がデジタル画像信号1^—1^11, G_L in, B— Linとして入力され、各水平走査期間の後半では、右画像を表すデジタル画 像信号 xRy— R, xGy_R, xBy— R(x= l〜m、 y= l〜n)がデジタル画像信号 R _Lin, G_Lin, B_Linとして入力される。 Next, the operation in the display mapping input mode (alternate input mode) when driving a DV liquid crystal panel (Fig. 30) with a vertically long pixel arrangement is shown in Figs. 24 and 23. This will be described with reference to the operation chart. In this case, the input-side selector 302 is provided with the input-side selection control signals SI and S2 shown in FIG. 24 (A), and the left image data DaL and the right image data DaR as shown in FIG. 5 (B). One system of digital image signals DV corresponding to combined image data arranged in the row direction is converted into digital image signals R-Lin, G-Lin, B-Lin shown in Fig. 24 (B). , Input serially from C1 in sub-pixel units. At this time, in the first half of each horizontal scanning period, the digital image signal xRy — L, xGy_L, 8 —1 ^ = 1 to! 11, = 1 to 11) representing the left image is converted to the digital image signal 1 ^ —1 ^ 11, G_L in, B— Input as Lin, and digital image signals xRy—R, xGy_R, xBy—R (x = l to m, y = l to n) representing the right image are digital in the second half of each horizontal scanning period. Input as image signals R_Lin, G_Lin, B_Lin.
[0094] 入力側セレクタ 302は、これらの制御信号および画像信号の入力に対して、図 24 ( C)に示すように、各水平走査期間の前半では、左画像を表すデジタル画像信号 xR y_L, xGy_L, xBy— Lを第 1の出力端子群 1Y1〜: LY3からそれぞれ出力して、ラ インメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1にそれぞれ供給し、各水平走査期間の後半では、 右画像を表すデジタル画像信号 xRy— R, xGy_R, xBy— Rを第 2の出力端子群 1 Y4〜: LY6からそれぞれ出力して、ラインメモリ 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br〖こそれぞれ 供給する。これに対応して、ラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1は、各水平走査期間 の前半に入力側セレクタ 302から供給されるデジタル画像信号を取り込んで保持し、 ラインメモリ 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Brは、各水平走査期間の後半に入力側セレクタ 3 02から供給されるデジタル画像信号を取り込んで保持する。なお、図 24 (B)および 図 24 (C)は、表示すべき画像の 2行目に相当するデジタル画像信号が入力側セレク タ 302に入力された時点の入力側および出力側の信号を示しており、この時点では 、ラインメモ U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Brは、表示すべき画像 の 1行目に相当するデジタル画像信号を保持している。また、図 24において" X"は 無効または不定の信号値を示して 、る(以下で言及するの他の図にお ヽても同様)。 [0094] With respect to the input of these control signals and image signals, the input-side selector 302, as shown in FIG. 24C, in the first half of each horizontal scanning period, digital image signals xR y_L, xGy_L, xBy— L is output from the first output terminal group 1Y1 ~: LY3 is supplied to the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, respectively, and in the second half of each horizontal scanning period, digital image signals representing the right image xRy—R, xGy_R, xBy—R are output from the second output terminal group 1 Y4˜: LY6, respectively, and supplied to the line memories 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br. Correspondingly, the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1 capture and hold the digital image signal supplied from the input side selector 302 in the first half of each horizontal scanning period, and the line memories 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br In the second half of the scanning period, the digital image signal supplied from the input side selector 302 is captured and held. FIGS. 24B and 24C show the signals on the input side and the output side when the digital image signal corresponding to the second line of the image to be displayed is input to the input side selector 302. At this time, the line memos U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br hold the digital image signal corresponding to the first line of the image to be displayed. In FIG. 24, “X” indicates an invalid or indefinite signal value (the same applies to the other figures mentioned below).
[0095] このようにして左画像を表すデジタル画像信号 xRy—L, xGy_L, xBy— Lをそれ ぞれ畐 ij画素単位でシリアノレに人力したラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1、および、 右画像を表すデジタル画像信号 xRy— R, xGy_R, xBy— Rをそれぞれ副画素単
位でシリアルに入力したラインメモリ 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Brは、それらの画像信号 を、表示すべき左右画像の 1行分ずつパラレルに出力する。すなわち、既述の 2系統 同時入力モードの場合と同様、 3個のラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1は、左画像 を表すデジタル画像信号を画素単位でシリアルに入力し当該左画像の 1行分ずつ ノ ラレルに出力する第 1の直並列変^^として機能し、他の 3個のラインメモリ 304Rr , 304Gr, 304Brは、右画像を表すデジタル画像信号を画素単位でシリアルに入力 し当該右画像の 1行分ずつパラレルに出力する第 2の直並列変 として機能する 。したがって、この表示マッピング入力モードにおいても、ラッチ回路 306は、上記ラ インメモ U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br力らノ ラレノレに出力され る左右画像の 1行分のデジタル画像信号を受け取り、図 24 (D)に示すラッチストロー ブ信号 LSに基づきラッチして、図 24 (E)および図 24 (F)に示すように当該 1行分の デジタル画像信号を出力する。 [0095] In this way, the digital image signals xRy—L, xGy_L, and xBy—L representing the left image are line memory 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, and the right image, each of which is manually input to cylinole in ij pixels. Digital image signals xRy—R, xGy_R, xBy—R The line memories 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br that are serially input in order output those image signals in parallel for each line of the left and right images to be displayed. That is, as in the case of the two-line simultaneous input mode described above, the three line memories 304R1, 304G1, and 304B1 input digital image signals representing the left image serially in units of pixels, and one line for the left image. The other three line memories 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br function as the first series-parallel variable to be output to the normal, and digital image signals representing the right image are serially input in units of pixels to output the right image. It functions as a second series-parallel variable that outputs in parallel one line at a time. Therefore, even in this display mapping input mode, the latch circuit 306 receives the digital image signal for one line of the left and right images output to the NORENORE from the line memo U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br force, Latching is performed based on the latch strobe signal LS shown in FIG. 24 (D), and the digital image signal for one row is output as shown in FIGS. 24 (E) and 24 (F).
[0096] 出力側セレクタ 308、 DZ A変換回路 310および出力バッファ 312も、既述の 2系統 同時入力モードの場合と同様に動作し (図 23参照)、左右画像の 1行分の画像信号 力 副画素単位で交互に並ぶデータ信号 Rj, Bj, Gj (j = l〜2n)として図 23 (H)お よび図 23 (1)に示すように出力される。したがって、このようなデータ信号を縦長画素 配置構成の DV液晶パネル(図 30)のデータ信号線に印加することにより当該 DV液 晶パネルを駆動することができる。 [0096] The output side selector 308, the DZ A conversion circuit 310, and the output buffer 312 operate in the same manner as in the two-system simultaneous input mode described above (see FIG. 23), and the image signal power for one line of the left and right images Data signals Rj, Bj, Gj (j = 1 to 2n) arranged alternately in subpixel units are output as shown in FIGS. 23 (H) and 23 (1). Therefore, the DV liquid crystal panel can be driven by applying such a data signal to the data signal line of the DV liquid crystal panel (FIG. 30) having a vertically long pixel arrangement.
[0097] < 2. 4 データドライバの動作例 3 > [0097] <2.4 Data Driver Operation Example 3>
次に、横長画素配置構成の DV液晶パネル(図 1、図 4)を駆動する場合における同 時入力モードでの動作を、図 25および図 16に示すタイミングチャートを参照して説 明する。この場合、入力側セレクタ 302には、図 25 (A)に示す入力側選択制御信号 SI, S2が与えられると共に、左画像および右画像を表す 2系統のデジタル画像信号 DV1, DV2が、図 25 (B)に示すデジタル画像信号 R— Lin, G— Lin, B— Lin, R_ Rin, G— Rin, B— Rinとして、副画素単位でシリアルに入力される。入力側セレクタ 302は、これらの制御信号および画像信号の入力に対し、図 18 (A)に示す真理値 表に従って図 25 (C)に示すように、上記デジタル画像信号 R— Lin, G— Lin, B_L in, R Rin, G Rin, B Rinを出力端子群 1Y1〜1Y6からそれぞれ出力して、ラ
インメモ U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Brにそれぞれ供給する。 なお、図 25 (B)および図 25 (C)は、表示すべき画像 (左画像および右画像)の 2行 目に相当するデジタル画像信号が入力側セレクタ 302に入力された時点の入力側 および出力側の信号を示しており、この時点では、ラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304 Bl, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Brは、表示すべき画像の 1行目に相当するデジタル画像 信号を保持している。 Next, the operation in the simultaneous input mode when driving a DV liquid crystal panel (FIGS. 1 and 4) having a horizontally long pixel arrangement will be described with reference to timing charts shown in FIGS. In this case, the input-side selector 302 is provided with the input-side selection control signals SI and S2 shown in FIG. 25A, and two digital image signals DV1 and DV2 representing the left image and the right image are shown in FIG. Digital image signals R-Lin, G-Lin, B-Lin, R_Rin, G-Rin, B-Rin shown in (B) are serially input in units of sub-pixels. As shown in FIG. 25 (C), the input-side selector 302 receives the control signal and the image signal as shown in FIG. 25 (C) according to the truth table shown in FIG. 18 (A). , B_L in, R Rin, G Rin, B Rin are output from the output terminal groups 1Y1 to 1Y6 respectively. Supply to Inmemo U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br, respectively. 25 (B) and 25 (C) show the input side when the digital image signal corresponding to the second line of the image to be displayed (the left image and the right image) is input to the input side selector 302 and The signals on the output side are shown. At this time, the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304 Bl, 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br hold the digital image signal corresponding to the first line of the image to be displayed.
[0098] ラインメモ U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Brは、このようにしてそ れぞれ副画素単位でシリアルに入力したデジタル画像信号 R— Lin, G— Lin, B_L in, R_Rin, G_Rin, B一 Rinを、表示すべき左右画像画像の 1行分ずっパラレノレ に出力する。すなわち、縦長画素配置構成の液晶パネルを駆動する場合とは異なり 、 3個のラインメモリ 304G1, 304Rr, 304Brは、左画像を表すデジタル画像信号を 画素単位でシリアルに入力し当該左画像の 1行分ずつパラレルに出力する第 1の直 並列変^^として機能し、他の 3個のラインメモリ 304R1, 304B1, 304Grは、右画像 を表すデジタル画像信号を画素単位でシリアルに入力し当該右画像の 1行分ずつ ノ ラレルに出力する第 2の直並列変翻として機能する。 [0098] Line memos U304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br are digital image signals R-Lin, G-Lin, B_Lin, R_Rin, which are serially input in units of sub-pixels in this way. G_Rin, B 1 Rin is output to the parallel line for one line of the left and right image to be displayed. That is, unlike the case of driving a liquid crystal panel having a vertically long pixel arrangement, the three line memories 304G1, 304Rr, and 304Br input digital image signals representing the left image serially in units of pixels, and one line of the left image. The other three line memories 304R1, 304B1, and 304Gr function as the first serial-to-parallel variation that outputs the data in parallel, and input the digital image signal representing the right image serially in units of pixels. It functions as the second series-parallel transformation that outputs to the normal by one line.
[0099] 上記ラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Brとラッチ回路 30 6とは、既述のように図 17に示す如く接続されている。このため、ラッチ回路 306は、 上記ラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br力らノラレノレに出 力される左画像および右画像の 1行分のデジタル画像信号を受け取り、図 25 (D)に 示すラッチストローブ信号 LSに基づきラッチして、図 25 (E)および図 25 (F)に示すよ うに左画像および右画像の当該 1行分のデジタル画像信号を出力する。すなわち、 左画像の画素を形成する 3つの副画素形成部(R副画素、 G副画素および B副画素) が取り込むべきデータに相当する信号 xRy—L, xGy_L, xBy— Lと、右画像の画 素を形成する 3つの副画素形成部(R副画素、 G副画素および B副画素)が取り込む べきデータに相当する信号 xRy— R, xGy_R, xBy— Rとがラッチ回路 306の出力 側において交互に並ぶことになる。ラッチ回路 306は、各ブロックにおいて、このよう なデジタル画像信号を 1水平走査期間の間保持し信号 A2, B2, C2として出力する
[0100] 出力側セレクタ 308には、ラッチ回路 306から左右画像の上記 1行分のデジタル画 像信号が入力されると共に(図 16 (D)および図 16 (E) )、図 21 (B)に示す出力側選 択制御信号 S3, S4が与えられる。ここで出力側選択制御信号 S3, S4の値 (信号 S3 の値と信号 S4の値との組み合わせ)は、各水平走査期間において 1Z3水平走査期 間毎に切り替わる。これにより出力側セレクタ 308は、表示すべき画像 (左画像およ び右画像)の 1行における各画素を形成する 3つの副画素形成部(R副画素、 G副画 素および B副画素)が取り込むべきデータに相当する信号である同一画素信号群 xR y_Z, xGy_Z, xBy_Zを 1/3水平走査期間ずつ順次に出力する(x= l〜m;y = l〜n;Z=L, R)。すなわち、その同一画素信号群を構成する信号を、図 16 (F) および図 16 (G)に示すように 1水平走査期間(1H期間)において時分割で信号 Y1 , Y2, Y3として出力する。ただし、これらの信号 Yl, Y2, Y3は同一の信号である。 この時分割出力における順序は、図 1および図 4に示す横長画素配置構成に対応し ている。また、出力側選択制御信号 S3, S4は、ゲートドライバ 400による走査信号線 Lgの選択に同期して切り替わる。 The line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br and the latch circuit 306 are connected as shown in FIG. 17 as described above. For this reason, the latch circuit 306 receives the digital image signals for one row of the left image and the right image output from the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br force to the NORENORE, and FIG. Is latched based on the latch strobe signal LS shown in FIG. 25, and the digital image signals for the corresponding one row of the left image and the right image are output as shown in FIGS. 25 (E) and 25 (F). That is, the signals xRy—L, xGy_L, xBy—L corresponding to the data to be taken in by the three subpixel forming portions (R subpixel, G subpixel, and B subpixel) that form the pixels of the left image, and the right image The signals xRy—R, xGy_R, and xBy—R corresponding to the data to be taken in by the three subpixel forming sections (R subpixel, G subpixel, and B subpixel) that form the pixel are on the output side of the latch circuit 306. They will be lined up alternately. In each block, the latch circuit 306 holds such a digital image signal for one horizontal scanning period and outputs it as signals A2, B2, and C2. [0100] The digital image signal for the above-mentioned one row of the left and right images is input from the latch circuit 306 to the output side selector 308 (FIGS. 16D and 16E) and FIG. 21B. Output side selection control signals S3 and S4 shown in Fig. 6 are given. Here, the values of the output side selection control signals S3 and S4 (a combination of the value of the signal S3 and the value of the signal S4) are switched every 1Z3 horizontal scanning period in each horizontal scanning period. As a result, the output-side selector 308 has three sub-pixel forming portions (R sub-pixel, G sub-pixel, and B sub-pixel) that form each pixel in one row of the image to be displayed (left image and right image). The same pixel signal group xR y_Z, xGy_Z, xBy_Z, which is a signal corresponding to the data to be captured, is sequentially output every 1/3 horizontal scanning period (x = l to m; y = l to n; Z = L, R ). That is, the signals constituting the same pixel signal group are output as signals Y1, Y2, Y3 in a time division manner in one horizontal scanning period (1H period) as shown in FIGS. However, these signals Yl, Y2, Y3 are the same signal. The order in this time-division output corresponds to the horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration shown in FIGS. The output side selection control signals S3 and S4 are switched in synchronization with the selection of the scanning signal line Lg by the gate driver 400.
[0101] このようにして出力側セレクタ 308から出力される信号は、 DZA変換回路でアナ口 グ電圧信号に変換される。これにより得られたアナログ電圧信号は、出力バッファ 31 2を介して、左右画像の1行分のデータ信号0 (1)〜0 (211)としてデータドラィバから 出力される。すなわち、各 3つの信号 Rj, Bj, Gjは同一のデータ信号 D (j)としてデー タドライバから出力され、かつ、各データ信号 D (j)は上記 3つの信号 A2, B2, C2 ( 同一画素信号群)の時分割出力に相当する信号となっている。したがって、このよう なデータ信号を横長画素配置構成の DV液晶パネル(図 1および図 4)のデータ信号 線に印加することにより当該 DV液晶パネルを駆動することができる。 [0101] The signal output from the output side selector 308 in this way is converted into an analog voltage signal by the DZA conversion circuit. The analog voltage signal thus obtained is output from the data driver as data signals 0 (1) to 0 (211) for one row of the left and right images via the output buffer 312. That is, each of the three signals Rj, Bj, Gj is output from the data driver as the same data signal D (j), and each data signal D (j) is the above three signals A2, B2, C2 (same pixel signal) Group)). Therefore, the DV liquid crystal panel can be driven by applying such a data signal to a data signal line of a DV liquid crystal panel (FIGS. 1 and 4) having a horizontally long pixel arrangement.
[0102] < 2. 5 データドライバの動作例 4> [0102] <2.5 Data Driver Operation Example 4>
次に、横長画素配置構成の DV液晶パネル(図 1、図 4)を駆動する場合における表 示マッピング入力モード(交互入力モード)での動作を、図 26および図 16に示すタイ ミングチャートを参照して説明する。この場合、入力側セレクタ 302には、図 26 (B)に 示す入力側選択制御信号 SI, S2が与えられると共に、図 5 (B)に示すように左画像 データ DaLと右画像データ DaRとを行方向に並べた形式の結合画像データに対応
する 1系統のデジタル画像信号 DVが、図 26 (B)に示すデジタル画像信号 R— Lin, G— Lin, B— Linとして入力端子群 Al, Bl, C1から副画素単位でシリアルに入力さ れる。このとき、各水平走査期間の前半では、左画像を表すデジタル画像信号 xRy — L, xGy_L, 8 —1^ = 1〜!11、 = 1〜11)がデジタル画像信号1^—1^11, G_L in, B— Linとして入力され、各水平走査期間の後半では、右画像を表すデジタル画 像信号 xRy— R, xGy_R, xBy— R(x= l〜m、 y= l〜n)がデジタル画像信号 R _Lin, G_Lin, B_Linとして入力される。 Next, refer to the timing charts shown in Fig. 26 and Fig. 16 for the operation in the display mapping input mode (alternate input mode) when driving a DV LCD panel (Figs. 1 and 4) with a horizontally long pixel arrangement. To explain. In this case, the input-side selector 302 is provided with the input-side selection control signals SI and S2 shown in FIG. 26 (B), and the left image data DaL and the right image data DaR as shown in FIG. 5 (B). Supports combined image data arranged in rows One digital image signal DV is serially input in units of subpixels from the input terminal group Al, Bl, C1 as digital image signals R-Lin, G-Lin, B-Lin shown in Fig. 26 (B) . At this time, in the first half of each horizontal scanning period, the digital image signal xRy — L, xGy_L, 8 —1 ^ = 1 to! 11, = 1 to 11) representing the left image is converted to the digital image signal 1 ^ —1 ^ 11, G_L in, B— Input as Lin, and digital image signals xRy—R, xGy_R, xBy—R (x = l to m, y = l to n) representing the right image are digital in the second half of each horizontal scanning period. Input as image signals R_Lin, G_Lin, B_Lin.
[0103] 入力側セレクタ 302は、これらの制御信号および画像信号の入力に対して、図 18 ( A)の真理値表に従って図 26 (C)に示すように、各水平走査期間の前半では、左画 像を表すデジタル画像信号 xRy— L, xGy_L, xBy— Lを出力端子群 1Y2, 1Y4, 1Y6からそれぞれ出力して、ラインメモリ 304G1, 304Rr, 304Brにそれぞれ供給し 、各水平走査期間の後半では、右画像を表すデジタル画像信号 xRy— R, xGy_R , xBy— Rを出力端子群 1Y1, 1Y3, 1Y5からそれぞれ出力して、ラインメモリ 304R1 , 304B1, 304Gdこそれぞれ供給する。これ【こ対応して、ラインメモリ 304G1, 304Rr , 304Brは、各水平走査期間の前半に入力側セレクタ 302から供給されるデジタル 画像信号を取り込んで保持し、ラインメモリ 304R1, 304B1, 304Grは、各水平走査 期間の後半に入力側セレクタ 302から供給されるデジタル画像信号を取り込んで保 持する。なお、図 26 (B)および図 26 (C)は、表示すべき画像の 2行目に相当するデ ジタル画像信号が入力側セレクタ 302に入力された時点の入力側および出力側の 信号を示しており、この時点では、ラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 30 4Gr, 304Brは、表示すべき画像の 1行目に相当するデジタル画像信号を保持して いる。 [0103] As shown in FIG. 26C, the input-side selector 302 receives the control signal and the image signal in accordance with the truth table of FIG. 18A, and in the first half of each horizontal scanning period, Digital image signals xRy— L, xGy_L, xBy—L representing the left image are respectively output from the output terminal groups 1Y2, 1Y4, 1Y6 and supplied to the line memories 304G1, 304Rr, 304Br, respectively, and the latter half of each horizontal scanning period. Then, digital image signals xRy—R, xGy_R, and xBy—R representing the right image are output from the output terminal groups 1Y1, 1Y3, and 1Y5, respectively, and supplied to the line memories 304R1, 304B1, and 304Gd, respectively. Correspondingly, the line memories 304G1, 304Rr, 304Br capture and hold the digital image signal supplied from the input side selector 302 in the first half of each horizontal scanning period, and the line memories 304R1, 304B1, 304Gr In the second half of the horizontal scanning period, the digital image signal supplied from the input side selector 302 is captured and held. FIGS. 26B and 26C show the signals on the input side and the output side when the digital image signal corresponding to the second line of the image to be displayed is input to the input side selector 302. At this time, the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br hold digital image signals corresponding to the first line of the image to be displayed.
[0104] このようにして左画像を表すデジタル画像信号 xRy—L, xGy_L, xBy— Lをそれ ぞれ畐 ij画素単位でシリアノレに人力したラインメモリ 304G1, 304Rr, 304B、および、 右画像を表すデジタル画像信号 xRy— R, xGy_R, xBy— Rをそれぞれ副画素単 位でシリアルに入力したラインメモリ 304R1, 304B1, 304Grは、それらの画像信号を 、表示すべき左右画像の 1行分ずつパラレルに出力する。すなわち、 3個のラインメ モリ 304G1, 304Rr, 304Brは、左画像を表すデジタル画像信号を画素単位でシリ
アルに入力し当該左画像の 1行分ずつパラレルに出力する第 1の直並列変 とし て機能し、他の 3個のラインメモリ 304R1, 304B1, 304Grは、右画像を表すデジタル 画像信号を画素単位でシリアルに入力し当該右画像の 1行分ずつパラレルに出力 する第 2の直並列変換器として機能する。したがって、この表示マッピング入力モード 【こお ヽても、ラッチ回路 306ίま、上記ラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 3 04Gr, 304Brからパラレルに出力される左右画像の 1行分のデジタル画像信号を受 け取り、図 26 (D)に示すラッチストローブ信号 LSに基づきラッチして、図 26 (E)およ び図 26 (F)に示すように当該 1行分のデジタル画像信号を出力する。 [0104] In this way, the digital image signals xRy—L, xGy_L, and xBy—L representing the left image are represented by line memories 304G1, 304Rr, 304B, and the right image, each of which is manually input to ij pixels. Line memory 304R1, 304B1, and 304Gr that input digital image signals xRy—R, xGy_R, and xBy—R serially in units of sub-pixels in parallel for each row of left and right images to be displayed. Output. That is, the three line memories 304G1, 304Rr, and 304Br serialize the digital image signal representing the left image in units of pixels. The other three line memories 304R1, 304B1, and 304Gr use the digital image signal that represents the right image as a pixel. It functions as a second serial-to-parallel converter that inputs serially in units and outputs in parallel each row of the right image. Therefore, this display mapping input mode [Even if this is the case, the latch circuit 306, or the line memory 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Br digital image signal for one row of left and right images output in parallel. Is received and latched based on the latch strobe signal LS shown in FIG. 26 (D), and the digital image signal for one row is output as shown in FIGS. 26 (E) and 26 (F). .
[0105] 出力側セレクタ 308には、上記のようにラッチ回路 306から左右画像の 1行分のデ ジタル画像信号が入力されると共に(図 16 (D)および図 16 (E) )、図 21 (B)に示す 出力側選択制御信号 S3, S4が与えられる。したがって、出力側セレクタ 308は、上 記動作例 3の場合と同様にして、同一画素信号群を構成する信号を、図 16 (F)およ び図 16 (G)に示すように 1水平走査期間(1H期間)において時分割で信号 Yl, Y2 , Y3として出力する。ただし、これらの信号 Yl, Y2, Y3は同一の信号である。 The output side selector 308 receives a digital image signal for one row of the left and right images from the latch circuit 306 as described above (FIGS. 16D and 16E), and FIG. Output side selection control signals S3 and S4 shown in (B) are given. Therefore, the output-side selector 308 performs one horizontal scanning as shown in FIGS. 16 (F) and 16 (G) in the same manner as in operation example 3 above. Output as signals Yl, Y2, Y3 in time division (1H period). However, these signals Yl, Y2, Y3 are the same signal.
[0106] このようにして出力側セレクタ 308から出力される信号は、 DZA変換回路でアナ口 グ電圧信号に変換され、これらのアナログ電圧信号は、出力バッファ 312を介して、 左右画像の 1行分のデータ信号 D (l)〜D (2n)としてデータドライバから出力される 。すなわち、各 3つの信号 Rj, Bj, Gjは同一のデータ信号 D (j)としてデータドライバ 力 出力され、かつ、各データ信号 D (j)は上記 3つの信号 A2, B2, C2 (同一画素 信号群)の時分割出力に相当する信号となっている。したがって、このようなデータ信 号を横長画素配置構成の DV液晶パネル(図 1および図 4)のデータ信号線に印加 することにより当該 DV液晶パネルを駆動することができる。 [0106] The signal output from the output side selector 308 in this way is converted into an analog voltage signal by the DZA conversion circuit, and these analog voltage signals are passed through the output buffer 312 to one line of the left and right images. Minute data signals D (l) to D (2n) are output from the data driver. That is, each of the three signals Rj, Bj, Gj is output as the same data signal D (j) as a data driver, and each data signal D (j) is output from the above three signals A2, B2, C2 (same pixel signal). Group)). Therefore, the DV liquid crystal panel can be driven by applying such a data signal to the data signal line of the DV liquid crystal panel (FIGS. 1 and 4) having a horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration.
[0107] < 2. 6 データドライバの動作例 5 > [0107] <2. 6 Data driver operation example 5>
次に、縦長画素配置構成の SV液晶パネルを駆動する場合におけるノーマル表示 入力モードでの動作を、図 27および図 28に示すタイミングチャートを参照して説明 する。この場合、入力側セレクタ 302には、図 27 (A)に示す入力側選択制御信号 S1 , S2が与えられると共に、図 27 (B)に示す 1系統のデジタル画像信号が入力端子群 Al, Bl, C1から副画素単位でシリアルに入力される。このとき、 1画素に相当する信
号 xRy, xGy, xByが入力される毎に、入力側選択制御信号 SI, S2 (信号 SIの値と 信号 S2の値との組み合わせ)が切り替わる。 Next, the operation in the normal display input mode when driving an SV liquid crystal panel having a vertically long pixel arrangement will be described with reference to timing charts shown in FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. In this case, the input-side selector 302 is provided with the input-side selection control signals S1 and S2 shown in FIG. 27 (A), and one digital image signal shown in FIG. , Serially input from C1 in sub-pixel units. At this time, a signal equivalent to one pixel Each time the signal xRy, xGy, xBy is input, the input side selection control signals SI, S2 (combination of the value of signal SI and the value of signal S2) are switched.
[0108] 入力側セレクタ 302は、これらの制御信号および画像信号の入力に対して、図 18 ( A)の真理値表に従って図 27 (C)に示すように、各水平走査期間において、奇数番 目の画素に相当する信号 xRy, xGy, xBy (yは奇数)を出力端子群 1Y2, 1Y4, 1Y 6からそれぞれ出力して、ラインメモリ 304G1, 304Rr, 304Brにそれぞれ供給し、偶 数番目の画素に相当する信号 xRy, xGy, xBy (yは偶数)を出力端子群 1Y1, 1Y3 , 1Y5力らそれぞれ出力して、ラインメモリ 304R1, 304B1, 304Grにそれぞれ供給 する。これに対応して、ラインメモリ 304G1, 304Rr, 304Brは、各水平走査期間に おける奇数番目の画素に対応する期間に入力側セレクタ 302から供給されるデジタ ル画像信号を取り込んで保持し、ラインメモリ 304R1, 304B1, 304Grは、各水平走 查期間における偶数番目の画素に対応する期間に入力側セレクタ 302から供給され るデジタル画像信号を取り込んで保持する。なお、図 27 (B)および図 27 (C)は、表 示すべき画像の 2行目に相当するデジタル画像信号が入力側セレクタ 302に入力さ れた時点の入力側および出力側の信号を示しており、この時点では、ラインメモリ 30 4R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, 304Brは、表示すべさ画像の 1行目〖こネ目当 するデジタル画像信号を保持して 、る。 As shown in FIG. 27 (C), the input-side selector 302 receives odd numbers in these horizontal scanning periods as shown in FIG. 27 (C) according to the truth table of FIG. 18 (A). Signals xRy, xGy, xBy (y is an odd number) corresponding to the eye pixel are respectively output from the output terminal groups 1Y2, 1Y4, 1Y6 and supplied to the line memories 304G1, 304Rr, 304Br, respectively. The signals xRy, xGy, and xBy (y is an even number) corresponding to are output from the output terminal groups 1Y1, 1Y3, and 1Y5, and supplied to the line memories 304R1, 304B1, and 304Gr, respectively. Correspondingly, the line memories 304G1, 304Rr, and 304Br capture and hold the digital image signal supplied from the input-side selector 302 during the period corresponding to the odd-numbered pixels in each horizontal scanning period. 304R1, 304B1, and 304Gr capture and hold a digital image signal supplied from the input-side selector 302 in a period corresponding to an even-numbered pixel in each horizontal scanning period. FIGS. 27B and 27C show the signals on the input side and the output side when the digital image signal corresponding to the second line of the image to be displayed is input to the input-side selector 302. At this time, the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304Gr, and 304Br hold the digital image signal corresponding to the first line of the display smooth image.
[0109] このようにして、表示すべき画像の各行における奇数番目の画素に相当する画像 信号 xRy, xGy, xBy(yは奇数)をそれぞれ副画素単位でシリアルに入力したライン メモリ 304G1, 304Rr, 304B、および、表示すべき画像の各行における偶数番目の 画素に相当する画像信号 xRy, xGy, xBy (yは偶数)をそれぞれ副画素単位でシリ アルに入力したラインメモリ 304R1, 304B1, 304Grは、それらの画像信号を、表示 すべき画像の 1行分ずつパラレルに出力する。すなわち、 3個のラインメモリ 304G1, 304Rr, 304Brは、表示すべき画像の各行の奇数番目の画素を表すデジタル画像 信号を画素単位でシリアルに入力し当該画像の 1行のうち奇数番目の画素に相当す る分ずつパラレルに出力する第 1の直並列変^^として機能し、他の 3個のラインメ モリ 304R1, 304B1, 304Grは、表示すべき画像の各行の偶数番目の画素を表すデ ジタル画像信号を画素単位でシリアルに入力し当該画像の 1行のうち偶数番目の画
素に相当する分ずつパラレルに出力する第 2の直並列変換器として機能する。した 力 て、ラッチ回路 306は、上記ラインメモリ 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304 Gr, 304Br力もパラレルに出力される 1行分のデジタル画像信号を受け取り、図 27 ( D)に示すラッチストローブ信号 LSに基づきラッチして、図 27 (E)および図 27 (F)に 示すように当該 1行分のデジタル画像信号を出力する。 In this way, the line memories 304G1, 304Rr, in which the image signals xRy, xGy, xBy (y is an odd number) corresponding to the odd-numbered pixels in each row of the image to be displayed are serially input in units of sub-pixels. The line memories 304R1, 304B1, and 304Gr that serially input 304B and image signals xRy, xGy, and xBy (y is an even number) corresponding to even-numbered pixels in each row of the image to be displayed These image signals are output in parallel for each line of the image to be displayed. That is, the three line memories 304G1, 304Rr, and 304Br input digital image signals representing the odd-numbered pixels in each row of the image to be displayed serially in units of pixels, and apply them to the odd-numbered pixels in one row of the image. The other three line memories 304R1, 304B1, and 304Gr function as the first series-parallel variable ^^ that outputs the corresponding amount in parallel, and represent the even-numbered pixels in each row of the image to be displayed. The image signal is input serially in pixel units, and the even-numbered image in one row of the image is displayed. It functions as a second serial-to-parallel converter that outputs in parallel the amount corresponding to the element. As a result, the latch circuit 306 receives a digital image signal for one line in which the line memories 304R1, 304G1, 304B1, 304Rr, 304 Gr, and 304Br are also output in parallel. The latch strobe signal shown in FIG. Latching is performed based on LS, and the digital image signal for one row is output as shown in FIGS. 27 (E) and 27 (F).
[0110] 出力側セレクタ 308には、ラッチ回路 306から上記画像の 1行分のデジタル画像信 号が入力されると共に(図 28 (D)および図 28 (E) )、図 28 (C)に示す出力側選択制 御信号 S3, S4が与えられる。したがって、出力側セレクタ 308は、図 28 (F)および図 28 (G)に示すような信号 Yl, Y2, Y3を各ブロックから出力する。 [0110] A digital image signal for one row of the above image is input to the output-side selector 308 from the latch circuit 306 (FIGS. 28D and 28E), as shown in FIG. Output side selection control signals S3 and S4 are provided. Accordingly, the output side selector 308 outputs signals Yl, Y2, Y3 as shown in FIGS. 28 (F) and 28 (G) from each block.
[0111] このようにして出力側セレクタ 308から出力される信号は、 DZA変換回路でアナ口 グ電圧信号に変換され、これらのアナログ電圧信号は、出力バッファ 312を介して、 表示すべき画像の 1行分のデータ信号 Rj, Bj, Gj (j = l〜2n)として図 28 (H)および 図 28 (1)に示すように出力される。したがって、このようなデータ信号を縦長画素配置 構成の SV液晶パネルのデータ信号線に印加することにより当該 SV液晶パネルを駆 動することができる。 [0111] The signal output from the output-side selector 308 in this way is converted into an analog voltage signal by the DZA conversion circuit, and these analog voltage signals are output to the image to be displayed via the output buffer 312. The data signals Rj, Bj, Gj (j = l to 2n) for one row are output as shown in FIGS. 28 (H) and 28 (1). Therefore, the SV liquid crystal panel can be driven by applying such a data signal to the data signal line of the SV liquid crystal panel having a vertically long pixel arrangement.
[0112] < 2. 7 データドライバの動作例 6 > [0112] <2. 7 Data driver operation example 6>
次に、横長画素配置構成の SV液晶パネルを駆動する場合におけるノーマル表示 入力モードでの動作を、図 27および図 29に示すタイミングチャートを参照して説明 する。この場合、入力側セレクタ 302には、図 27 (A)に示す入力側選択制御信号 S1 , S2が与えられると共に、図 27 (B)に示す 1系統のデジタル画像信号が入力端子群 Al, Bl, C1から副画素単位でシリアルに入力される。したがって、この場合、上記 動作例 5と同様にして、ラッチ回路 306は、出力側セレクタ 308の各ブロックに入力す べき信号として、図 29 (D)および図 29 (E) (図 27 (E)および図 27 (F) )に示すような デジタル画像信号 A2, B2, C2を出力する。 Next, the operation in the normal display input mode when driving an SV liquid crystal panel having a horizontally long pixel arrangement will be described with reference to timing charts shown in FIGS. In this case, the input-side selector 302 is provided with the input-side selection control signals S1 and S2 shown in FIG. 27 (A), and one digital image signal shown in FIG. , Serially input from C1 in sub-pixel units. Therefore, in this case, as in the above operation example 5, the latch circuit 306 receives the signals to be input to each block of the output side selector 308 as shown in FIG. 29 (D) and FIG. 29 (E) (FIG. 27 (E) And digital image signals A2, B2, C2 as shown in Fig. 27 (F)) are output.
[0113] 出力側セレクタ 308の各ブロックには、上記デジタル画像信号 A2, B2, C2が入力 されると共に(図 29 (D)および図 29 (E) )、図 29 (C)に示す出力側選択制御信号 S3 , S4が与えられる。ここで出力側選択制御信号 S3, S4の値 (信号 S3の値と信号 S4 の値との組み合わせ)は、各水平走査期間において 1Z3水平走査期間毎に切り替
わる。したがって、出力側セレクタ 308の各ブロックは、表示すべき画像の 1行におけ る各画素を形成する 3つの副画素形成部(R副画素、 G副画素および B副画素)が取 り込むべきデータに相当する同一画素信号群 xRy, xGy, xByを 1/3水平走査期 間ずつ順次に出力する。すなわち、その同一画素信号群を構成する信号を、図 29 ( F)および図 29 (G)に示すように 1水平走査期間において時分割で信号 Yl, Y2, Y 3として出力する。ただし、これらの信号 Yl, Y2, Y3は同一の信号である。 [0113] The digital image signals A2, B2, and C2 are input to each block of the output side selector 308 (FIGS. 29D and 29E), and the output side shown in FIG. 29C. Selection control signals S3 and S4 are provided. Here, the values of the output side selection control signals S3 and S4 (the combination of the signal S3 value and the signal S4 value) are switched every 1Z3 horizontal scanning period in each horizontal scanning period. Worse. Therefore, each block of the output-side selector 308 should take in three subpixel forming portions (R subpixel, G subpixel, and B subpixel) that form each pixel in one row of the image to be displayed. The same pixel signal group xRy, xGy, xBy corresponding to the data is sequentially output every 1/3 horizontal scanning period. That is, the signals constituting the same pixel signal group are output as signals Yl, Y2, Y3 by time division in one horizontal scanning period as shown in FIGS. 29 (F) and 29 (G). However, these signals Yl, Y2, Y3 are the same signal.
[0114] このようにして出力側セレクタ 308から出力される信号は、 DZA変換回路でアナ口 グ電圧信号に変換され、これらのアナログ電圧信号は、出力バッファ 312を介して、 表示すべき画像の 1行分のデータ信号 D (1)〜D (2n)としてデータドライバから出力 される。すなわち、各 3つの信号 Rj, Bj, Gjは同一のデータ信号 D (j)としてデータド ライバから出力され、かつ、各データ信号 D (j)は上記 3つの信号 A2, B2, C2 (同一 画素信号群)の時分割出力に相当する信号となっている。したがって、このようなデ ータ信号を横長画素配置構成の SV液晶パネルのデータ信号線に印加することによ り当該 DV液晶パネルを駆動することができる。 [0114] The signal output from the output-side selector 308 in this way is converted into an analog voltage signal by the DZA conversion circuit, and these analog voltage signals are output via the output buffer 312 to the image to be displayed. One row of data signals D (1) to D (2n) are output from the data driver. That is, each of the three signals Rj, Bj, Gj is output from the data driver as the same data signal D (j), and each data signal D (j) is the above three signals A2, B2, C2 (same pixel signal) Group)). Therefore, the DV liquid crystal panel can be driven by applying such a data signal to the data signal line of the SV liquid crystal panel having the horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration.
[0115] < 2. 8 効果 > [0115] <2.8 Effect>
以上説明したように本実施形態に係るデータドライバでは、図 17に示すように、カラ 一画像表示の 3原色に対応する 3個のラインメモリを 1組として、 DV液晶パネルに対 応すべく左右画像にそれぞれ対応づけることができる 2組のラインメモリ(合計 6個の ラインメモリ) 304Rl〜304Brが設けられており、当該 6個のラインメモリ 304R1〜304 Brのそれぞれは、表示すべき画像を表す画像データを副画素単位でシリアルに入 力しパラレルに出力する直並列変翻として機能する。そして、表示すべき画像を表 す画像データ(表示データ)としてデータドライバにシリアルに与えられるデジタル画 像信号は、上記 6個のラインメモリ 304Rl〜304Brとラッチ回路 306との間の信号線 の接続関係を考慮しつつ、入力形式 (DV2系統同時入力形式、 DV表示マッピング 入力形式、ノーマル表示用の入力形式)に応じて、入力側選択制御信号 SI, S2を 切り替えることで、入力側セレクタ 302により上記 6個のラインメモリ 304Rl〜304Brの いずれかに供給される(図 18 (A)、図 19 (B)〜図 19 (E)参照)。また、ラッチ回路 30 6からの出力信号 A2, B2, C2は、駆動すべき液晶パネルの画素配置構成 (縦長画
素配置構成または横長画素配置構成)に応じて、出力側選択制御信号 S3, S4を切 り替えることで、データドライノから出力されるデータ信号の形式 (独立出力形式また は時分割出力形式)を出力側セレクタ 308によって変更できるようになつている(図 1 8 (B)ゝ図 20、図 21参照)。 As described above, in the data driver according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the three line memories corresponding to the three primary colors of the color image display are set as one set, and the left and right sides are compatible with the DV liquid crystal panel. Two sets of line memories (total of 6 line memories) 304Rl to 304Br that can be associated with images are provided, and each of the 6 line memories 304R1 to 304Br represents an image to be displayed. It functions as a series-parallel transformation that inputs image data in units of subpixels and outputs them in parallel. A digital image signal serially given to the data driver as image data (display data) representing an image to be displayed is a signal line connection between the six line memories 304Rl to 304Br and the latch circuit 306. By switching the input side selection control signals SI and S2 according to the input format (DV2 system simultaneous input format, DV display mapping input format, normal display input format) Supplied to one of the six line memories 304Rl to 304Br (see FIGS. 18A and 19B to 19E). The output signals A2, B2, and C2 from the latch circuit 30 6 are the pixel arrangement configuration of the liquid crystal panel to be driven (vertical image). Data signal format (independent output format or time-division output format) output from the data dryer by switching the output-side selection control signals S3 and S4 according to the basic configuration or horizontal pixel configuration) Can be changed by the output side selector 308 (see Fig. 18 (B) ゝ Fig. 20, Fig. 21).
[0116] したがって、本実施形態によれば、別途インタフェース回路を用意しなくても、縦長 画素配置構成または横長画素配置構成の DV液晶パネルまたは SV液晶パネルなど の各種の液晶パネルに応じた出力形式で駆動信号 (データ信号)を出力することが でき、かつ、表示すべき画像を表す画像信号の入力形式についても、 DV2系統同 時入力形式、 DV表示マッピング入力形式、ノーマル表示用の入力形式のいずれに も対応可能である。 Therefore, according to the present embodiment, an output format corresponding to various liquid crystal panels such as a DV liquid crystal panel or an SV liquid crystal panel having a vertically long pixel arrangement structure or a horizontally long pixel arrangement structure without separately preparing an interface circuit. The drive signal (data signal) can be output with the same, and the input format of the image signal representing the image to be displayed is the same as the DV2 simultaneous input format, DV display mapping input format, and normal display input format. Either can be supported.
[0117] < 2. 9 変形例 > [0117] <2. 9 Modification>
上記第 2の実施形態につき図 17および図 18に示した構成は一例であり、対応可 能な入力形式または出力形式が上記実施形態よりも制限されるものであっても、入 力形式または出力形式につき必要な範囲で自由度を確保できるものであればょ 、。 例えば、入力形式に自由度を確保しつつ (入力側セレクタ 302のような接続切換回 路を設けつつ)、駆動対象としての液晶パネルを横長画素配置構成の DV液晶パネ ルに限定するようにしてもよい。このようにすれば、対応可能な入出力形式について の自由度が低下するが、データドライバの構成は簡素化される(例えば図 6に示す出 力側セレクタ 308〜出力バッファ 312の構成等)。また逆に、対応可能な入力形式を 固定し、駆動対象としての液晶パネルにっ ヽては縦長画素配置構成と横長画素配 置構成のいずれにも (独立出力形式と時分割出力形式のいずれにも)対応できるよう に出力側にのみ出力側セレクタ 308のような接続切換回路を設ける構成としてもよい The configuration shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 for the second embodiment is an example, and even if the input format or output format that can be supported is more limited than the above embodiment, the input format or output format is not limited. If the degree of freedom can be secured within the required range for each type, For example, while ensuring flexibility in the input format (providing a connection switching circuit such as the input side selector 302), the liquid crystal panel to be driven is limited to a DV liquid crystal panel having a horizontally long pixel arrangement configuration. Also good. This reduces the degree of freedom with respect to the compatible input / output formats, but simplifies the configuration of the data driver (for example, the configuration of the output side selector 308 to the output buffer 312 shown in FIG. 6). Conversely, the input formats that can be supported are fixed, and for the liquid crystal panel to be driven, either the vertical pixel arrangement configuration or the horizontal pixel arrangement configuration (independent output format or time division output format) In addition, a connection switching circuit such as the output side selector 308 may be provided only on the output side so that it can be supported.
[0118] 上記第 2の実施形態では、液晶パネルのデータドライバを例に挙げて説明したが、 本発明は、これに限定されるものではなぐ液晶表示装置以外のマトリクス型の表示 装置における表示パネルのデータ側駆動回路についても適用可能である。 [0118] In the second embodiment, the data driver of the liquid crystal panel has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display panel in a matrix type display device other than the liquid crystal display device is not limited thereto. The present invention is also applicable to the data side driving circuit.
産業上の利用可能性 Industrial applicability
[0119] 本発明は、アクティブマトリクス型液晶表示装置等のようなマトリクス型表示装置に
適用されるものであり、 DV液晶表示装置や SV液晶表示装置等、画素配置構成の 異なる種々の表示装置におけるデータ信号線の駆動回路に適して!/、る。
[0119] The present invention relates to a matrix display device such as an active matrix liquid crystal display device. Applicable, suitable for data signal line drive circuits in various display devices with different pixel arrangements, such as DV liquid crystal display devices and SV liquid crystal display devices.
Claims
請求の範囲 The scope of the claims
[1] 列方向に延びる複数のデータ信号線と、当該複数のデータ信号線と交差し行方向 に延びる複数の走査信号線と、当該複数のデータ信号線と当該複数の走査信号線 との交差点にそれぞれ対応してマトリクス状に配置された複数の副画素形成部とを備 え、各副画素形成部は、対応する交差点を通る走査信号線が選択されているときに 対応するデータ信号線上の信号を副画素データとして取り込む表示装置において、 表示すべき画像を表す複数のデータ信号を前記複数のデータ信号線に印加するた めの,駆動回路であって、 [1] A plurality of data signal lines extending in the column direction, a plurality of scanning signal lines intersecting with the plurality of data signal lines and extending in the row direction, and intersections of the plurality of data signal lines and the plurality of scanning signal lines A plurality of sub-pixel forming portions arranged in a matrix corresponding to each of the sub-pixel forming portions, and each sub-pixel forming portion is arranged on a corresponding data signal line when a scanning signal line passing through a corresponding intersection is selected. In a display device that captures signals as sub-pixel data, a drive circuit for applying a plurality of data signals representing an image to be displayed to the plurality of data signal lines,
前記画像を表す画像信号を画素単位または副画素単位のシリアル信号として受け 取るための所定数の入力端子群と、前記入力端子群から入力される画像信号を画 素単位または副画素単位のシリアル信号として出力するための所定数の出力端子群 と有し、外部力も与えられる第 1の制御信号に基づき、前記所定数の入力端子群の 各入力端子群から入力される画像信号を出力すべき出力端子群を前記所定数の出 力端子群の間で切り替えるための第 1の接続切換回路と、 A predetermined number of input terminal groups for receiving image signals representing the image as serial signals in pixel units or sub-pixel units, and image signals input from the input terminal groups as serial signals in pixel units or sub-pixel units A predetermined number of output terminal groups for output as an output, and an image signal input from each input terminal group of the predetermined number of input terminal groups based on a first control signal to which an external force is also applied is output. A first connection switching circuit for switching a terminal group between the predetermined number of output terminal groups;
前記所定数の出力端子群の各出力端子群に対応して設けられ、対応する出力端 子群から出力される画像信号をシリアル信号として入力しパラレル信号として出力す る直並列変換器と、 A serial-parallel converter that is provided corresponding to each output terminal group of the predetermined number of output terminal groups, and that inputs an image signal output from the corresponding output terminal group as a serial signal and outputs it as a parallel signal;
各直並列変 力 出力されるパラレル信号に基づき前記複数のデータ信号を生 成するデータ信号生成回路と A data signal generation circuit for generating the plurality of data signals based on each parallel signal output;
を備えることを特徴とする駆動回路。 A drive circuit comprising:
[2] 前記複数の副画素形成部は、視点の配置可能な第 1の所定領域に対して表示さ れる第 1の画像を形成するための第 1の副画素形成部群と、視点の配置可能な第 2 の所定領域に対して表示される第 2の画像を形成するための第 2の副画素形成部群 とからなり、 [2] The plurality of sub-pixel forming units includes a first sub-pixel forming unit group for forming a first image displayed for a first predetermined area where a viewpoint can be arranged, and a viewpoint arrangement. A second sub-pixel forming unit group for forming a second image to be displayed with respect to a second predetermined area possible,
前記所定数の入力端子群は、前記第 1または第 2の画像を表す画像信号を受け取 るための第 1の入力端子群と、前記第 2の画像を表す画像信号を受け取るための第 2 の入力端子群とを含み、 The predetermined number of input terminal groups includes a first input terminal group for receiving an image signal representing the first or second image, and a second input terminal for receiving the image signal representing the second image. Input terminal group,
前記所定数の出力端子群は、前記第 1の入力端子群から入力される画像信号を出
力するための第 1の出力端子群と、前記第 1または第 2の入力端子群から入力される 画像信号を出力するための第 2の出力端子群とを含み、 The predetermined number of output terminal groups output image signals input from the first input terminal group. A first output terminal group for outputting, and a second output terminal group for outputting an image signal input from the first or second input terminal group,
前記第 1の接続切換回路は、前記第 1の制御信号に基づき、前記第 1の入力端子 群力 入力される画像信号を出力すべき出力端子群を前記第 1の出力端子群と前 記第 2の出力端子群との間で切り換えると共に、前記第 2の入力端子群力 入力され る画像信号を前記第 2の出力端子群力 出力する力否かを切り換えることを特徴とす る、請求項 1に記載の駆動回路。 The first connection switching circuit includes a first output terminal group and an output terminal group to which an image signal to be input is output as the first output terminal group based on the first control signal. The second input terminal group force is switched between two output terminal groups and whether or not the second output terminal group force is outputted is switched. The drive circuit according to 1.
[3] 前記データ信号生成回路は、 [3] The data signal generation circuit includes:
各直並列変 カゝら出力されるパラレル信号を、各直並列変 が前記画像に おける 1行分の画素を表す次のシリアル信号を入力してパラレル信号として出力する までの間、保持し出力する保持回路と、 Holds and outputs the parallel signal output from each serial-parallel converter until each serial-parallel converter inputs the next serial signal representing one row of pixels in the image and outputs it as a parallel signal. Holding circuit to
外部力も与えられる第 2の制御信号に基づき、前記保持回路からパラレル信号と して出力される信号のうち前記 1行分の画素のそれぞれを形成する所定数の副画素 形成部が取り込むべき副画素データに相当する信号力 なる同一画素信号群を構 成する信号を順次選択して出力する第 2の接続切換回路と、 Based on a second control signal to which an external force is also applied, a predetermined number of subpixels that form each of the pixels for one row of signals output as parallel signals from the holding circuit are to be taken in by the subpixel forming units A second connection switching circuit for sequentially selecting and outputting signals constituting the same pixel signal group having a signal power corresponding to data;
前記第 2の接続切換回路から出力される信号に基づき前記複数のデータ信号を 生成し出力する信号生成出力回路と A signal generation output circuit for generating and outputting the plurality of data signals based on a signal output from the second connection switching circuit;
を含むことを特徴とする、請求項 1に記載の駆動回路。 The drive circuit according to claim 1, comprising:
[4] 前記第 2の接続切換回路は、 [4] The second connection switching circuit includes:
前記第 2の制御信号が第 1の所定信号である場合には、当該第 1の所定信号に 基づき、前記同一画素信号群を構成する信号を順次選択して出力し、 When the second control signal is a first predetermined signal, the signals constituting the same pixel signal group are sequentially selected and output based on the first predetermined signal,
前記第 2の制御信号が第 2の所定信号である場合には、前記同一画素信号群を 構成する全ての信号を選択して同時に出力することを特徴とする、請求項 3に記載の 駆動回路。 4. The drive circuit according to claim 3, wherein when the second control signal is a second predetermined signal, all the signals constituting the same pixel signal group are selected and output simultaneously. .
[5] 列方向に延びる複数のデータ信号線と、当該複数のデータ信号線と交差し行方向 に延びる複数の走査信号線と、当該複数のデータ信号線と当該複数の走査信号線 との交差点にそれぞれ対応してマトリクス状に配置された複数の副画素形成部とを備 え、各副画素形成部は、対応する交差点を通る走査信号線が選択されているときに
対応するデータ信号線上の信号を副画素データとして取り込む表示装置において、 表示すべき画像を表す複数のデータ信号を前記複数のデータ信号線に印加するた めの,駆動回路であって、 [5] A plurality of data signal lines extending in the column direction, a plurality of scanning signal lines intersecting with the plurality of data signal lines and extending in the row direction, and intersections of the plurality of data signal lines and the plurality of scanning signal lines A plurality of sub-pixel forming portions arranged in a matrix corresponding to each of the sub-pixel forming portions, and each sub-pixel forming portion has a scanning signal line passing through the corresponding intersection. In a display device that captures a signal on a corresponding data signal line as subpixel data, a drive circuit for applying a plurality of data signals representing an image to be displayed to the plurality of data signal lines,
前記副画素データに相当する画像信号を前記画像の少なくとも 1行分ずつ保持す る保持回路と、 A holding circuit for holding an image signal corresponding to the sub-pixel data for at least one row of the image;
外部力も与えられる第 2の制御信号に基づき、前記保持回路に保持されている画 像信号のうち、前記少なくとも 1行分の画素のそれぞれを形成する所定数の副画素 形成部が取り込むべき副画素データに相当する信号からなる同一画素信号群のい ずれ力または全てを選択して出力する第 2の接続切換回路と、 Based on the second control signal to which an external force is also applied, out of the image signals held in the holding circuit, the sub-pixels to be taken in by a predetermined number of sub-pixel forming units forming each of the pixels for at least one row A second connection switching circuit for selecting and outputting any or all of the same pixel signal group consisting of signals corresponding to data;
前記第 2の接続切換回路から出力される信号に基づき前記複数のデータ信号を生 成するデータ信号生成回路とを備え、 A data signal generation circuit that generates the plurality of data signals based on a signal output from the second connection switching circuit;
前記第 2の接続切換回路は、 The second connection switching circuit is
前記第 2の制御信号が第 1の所定信号である場合には、当該第 1の所定信号に 基づき、前記同一画素信号群を構成する信号を順次選択して出力し、 When the second control signal is a first predetermined signal, the signals constituting the same pixel signal group are sequentially selected and output based on the first predetermined signal,
前記第 2の制御信号が第 2の所定信号である場合には、前記同一画素信号群を 構成する全ての信号を選択して同時に出力することを特徴とする駆動回路。 When the second control signal is a second predetermined signal, all the signals constituting the same pixel signal group are selected and output simultaneously.
[6] 請求項 1から 5までのいずれか 1項に記載の駆動回路を備えた表示装置。 [6] A display device comprising the drive circuit according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
[7] 視点の配置可能な第 1の所定領域に対して表示される第 1の画像と視点の配置可 能な第 2の所定領域に対して表示される第 2の画像とが異なるように当該第 1および 第 2の画像を形成する第 1の表示装置を駆動するための第 1の動作モードと、前記第 1および第 2の所定領域に対して同一画像が表示されるように当該同一画像を形成 する第 2の表示装置を駆動するための第 2の動作モードとを有する駆動回路であつ て、 [7] The first image displayed for the first predetermined area where the viewpoint can be arranged is different from the second image displayed for the second predetermined area where the viewpoint can be arranged. The first operation mode for driving the first display device that forms the first and second images, and the same so that the same image is displayed on the first and second predetermined areas. A drive circuit having a second operation mode for driving a second display device for forming an image,
前記第 1および第 2の表示装置のそれぞれは、 Each of the first and second display devices is
列方向に延びる複数のデータ信号線と、 A plurality of data signal lines extending in the column direction;
前記複数のデータ信号線と交差し行方向に延びる複数の走査信号線と、 前記複数のデータ信号線と当該複数の走査信号線との交差点にそれぞれ対応し てマトリクス状に配置された複数の副画素形成部とを備え、
前記第 1および第 2の表示装置における各副画素形成部は、対応する交差点を通 る走査信号線が選択されているときに対応するデータ信号線上の信号を副画素デー タとして取り込み、 A plurality of scanning signal lines that intersect the plurality of data signal lines and extend in the row direction; and a plurality of sub signal lines arranged in a matrix corresponding to the intersections of the plurality of data signal lines and the plurality of scanning signal lines, respectively. A pixel forming portion, Each sub-pixel forming unit in the first and second display devices takes in a signal on the corresponding data signal line as sub-pixel data when a scanning signal line passing through the corresponding intersection is selected,
前記第 1の表示装置の前記複数の副画素形成部は、前記第 1の画像を形成するた めの第 1の副画素形成部群と前記第 2の画像を形成するための第 2の副画素形成部 群とからなり、当該第 1の副画素形成部群と当該第 2の副画素形成部群とは交互に 列状に配置され、 The plurality of subpixel forming portions of the first display device include a first subpixel forming portion group for forming the first image and a second subpixel forming portion for forming the second image. The first sub-pixel forming unit group and the second sub-pixel forming unit group are alternately arranged in a line,
前記第 2の表示装置の前記複数の副画素形成部は、前記同一画像を形成し、 当該駆動回路は、表示すべき画像を表す複数のデータ信号を生成し前記複数の データ信号線に印加するためのデータ信号線駆動回路を含み、 The plurality of sub-pixel forming portions of the second display device form the same image, and the driving circuit generates a plurality of data signals representing an image to be displayed and applies the data signals to the plurality of data signal lines. Including a data signal line driving circuit for
前記データ信号線駆動回路は、 The data signal line driving circuit includes:
前記第 1の画像または前記同一画像を表す画像信号を画素単位または副画素 単位のシリアル信号として受け取るための第 1の入力端子群と、前記第 2の画像を表 す画像信号を画素単位または副画素単位のシリアル信号として受け取るための第 2 の入力端子群とを有し、 A first input terminal group for receiving the first image or the image signal representing the same image as a serial signal in pixel units or sub-pixel units, and the image signal representing the second image as pixel units or sub-pixels. A second input terminal group for receiving as a serial signal in pixel units,
前記第 1の動作モードでは、前記第 1の入力端子群から入力される前記第 1の画 像を表す画像信号に基づき、前記第 1の副画素形成部群に対応するデータ信号線 に印加すべきデータ信号を生成すると共に、前記第 2の入力端子群力 入力される 前記第 2の画像を表す画像信号に基づき、前記第 2の副画素形成部群に対応する データ信号線に印加すべきデータ信号を生成し、 In the first operation mode, an image signal representing the first image input from the first input terminal group is applied to a data signal line corresponding to the first sub-pixel forming unit group. To generate a power data signal and to apply to the data signal line corresponding to the second sub-pixel forming unit group based on the image signal representing the second image input to the second input terminal group force Generate a data signal,
前記第 2の動作モードでは、前記第 1の入力端子群から入力される前記同一画像 を表す画像信号に基づき、前記第 2の表示装置の前記複数のデータ信号線に印加 すべきデータ信号を生成することを特徴とする、駆動回路。 前記データ信号線駆動回路は、 In the second operation mode, a data signal to be applied to the plurality of data signal lines of the second display device is generated based on an image signal representing the same image input from the first input terminal group. A drive circuit characterized by: The data signal line driving circuit includes:
前記第 1および第 2の入力端子群と、前記第 1および第 2の入力端子群から入力 される画像信号を画素単位または副画素単位のシリアル信号として出力するための 所定数の出力端子群と有し、当該駆動回路の動作モードが第 1の動作モードか第 2 の動作モードかに応じて、前記第 1および第 2の入力端子群の各入力端子群から入
力される画像信号を出力すべき出力端子群を前記所定数の出力端子群の間で切り 替えるための接続切換回路と、 The first and second input terminal groups, and a predetermined number of output terminal groups for outputting image signals input from the first and second input terminal groups as pixel-unit or sub-pixel unit serial signals; And input from each input terminal group of the first and second input terminal groups depending on whether the operation mode of the drive circuit is the first operation mode or the second operation mode. A connection switching circuit for switching an output terminal group to which an output image signal is output between the predetermined number of output terminal groups;
前記所定数の出力端子群の各出力端子群に対応して設けられ、対応する出力端 子群から出力される画像信号をシリアル信号として入力しパラレル信号として出力す る直並列変換器と、 A serial-parallel converter that is provided corresponding to each output terminal group of the predetermined number of output terminal groups, and that inputs an image signal output from the corresponding output terminal group as a serial signal and outputs it as a parallel signal;
各直並列変 力 出力されるパラレル信号に基づき前記複数のデータ信号を生 成するデータ信号生成回路とを含み、 A data signal generation circuit for generating the plurality of data signals based on the parallel signals to be output,
前記接続切換回路は、 The connection switching circuit is
前記第 1の動作モードでは、前記第 1の画像を表す画像信号が入力される直並 列変 カゝら出力されるパラレル信号に基づき、前記第 1の副画素形成部群に対応 するデータ信号線に印加すべきデータ信号が前記データ信号生成回路によって生 成されると共に、前記第 2の画像を表す画像信号が入力される直並列変 力ゝら出 力されるパラレル信号に基づき、前記第 2の副画素形成部群に対応するデータ信号 線に印加すべきデータ信号が前記データ信号生成回路によって生成されるように、 前記第 1および第 2の入力端子群と前記所定数の出力端子群とを接続し、 In the first operation mode, a data signal corresponding to the first sub-pixel forming unit group based on a parallel signal output from a serial parallel transformation to which an image signal representing the first image is input. A data signal to be applied to the line is generated by the data signal generation circuit, and based on the parallel signal output from the serial / parallel transformation to which the image signal representing the second image is input, the first signal is generated. The first and second input terminal groups and the predetermined number of output terminal groups so that the data signal to be applied to the data signal lines corresponding to the two sub-pixel forming unit groups is generated by the data signal generation circuit. And connect
前記第 2の動作モードでは、各直並列変翻から出力されるノ ラレル信号に基づ き、前記第 2の表示装置における前記複数のデータ信号線に印加すべきデータ信号 が前記データ信号生成回路によって生成されるように、前記第 1の入力端子群と前 記所定数の出力端子群とを接続することを特徴とする、請求項 7に記載の駆動回路。 列方向に延びる複数のデータ信号線と、当該複数のデータ信号線と交差し行方向 に延びる複数の走査信号線と、当該複数のデータ信号線と当該複数の走査信号線 との交差点にそれぞれ対応してマトリクス状に配置された複数の副画素形成部とを備 え、各副画素形成部は、対応する交差点を通る走査信号線が選択されているときに 対応するデータ信号線上の信号を副画素データとして取り込む表示装置において、 表示すべき画像を表す複数のデータ信号を前記複数のデータ信号線に印加するた めの駆動方法であって、 In the second operation mode, a data signal to be applied to the plurality of data signal lines in the second display device based on the normal signal output from each series-parallel conversion is the data signal generation circuit. The drive circuit according to claim 7, wherein the first input terminal group and the predetermined number of output terminal groups are connected to each other so as to be generated by the above. Corresponding to a plurality of data signal lines extending in the column direction, a plurality of scanning signal lines crossing the plurality of data signal lines and extending in the row direction, and intersections of the plurality of data signal lines and the plurality of scanning signal lines, respectively. A plurality of sub-pixel forming portions arranged in a matrix, and each sub-pixel forming portion outputs a signal on the corresponding data signal line when a scanning signal line passing through the corresponding intersection is selected. In a display device for capturing as pixel data, a driving method for applying a plurality of data signals representing an image to be displayed to the plurality of data signal lines,
前記画像を表す画像信号を画素単位または副画素単位のシリアル信号として受け 取るための所定数の入力端子群と、前記入力端子群から入力される画像信号を画
素単位または副画素単位のシリアル信号として出力するための所定数の出力端子群 と有する第 1の接続切換回路において、外部力 与えられる第 1の制御信号に基づ き、前記所定数の入力端子群の各入力端子群から入力される画像信号を出力すベ き出力端子群を前記所定数の出力端子群の間で切り替える第 1の接続切換ステップ と、 A predetermined number of input terminal groups for receiving an image signal representing the image as a serial signal in units of pixels or sub-pixels, and an image signal input from the input terminal group. In the first connection switching circuit having a predetermined number of output terminal groups for outputting as a unit-unit or sub-pixel unit serial signal, the predetermined number of input terminals based on the first control signal given by an external force A first connection switching step of switching an output terminal group to which an image signal input from each input terminal group of the group is to be output among the predetermined number of output terminal groups;
前記所定数の出力端子群の各出力端子群力 シリアル信号として出力される画像 信号をパラレル信号に変換して出力する直並列変換ステップと、 A serial-parallel conversion step of converting the image signal output as a serial signal into a parallel signal and outputting it as a parallel signal.
前記直並列変換ステップで出力されるパラレル信号に基づき前記複数のデータ信 号を生成するデータ信号生成ステップと A data signal generating step for generating the plurality of data signals based on the parallel signal output in the serial-parallel conversion step;
を備えることを特徴とする、駆動方法。 A driving method comprising:
[10] 前記複数の副画素形成部は、視点の配置可能な第 1の所定領域に対して表示さ れる第 1の画像を形成するための第 1の副画素形成部群と、視点の配置可能な第 2 の所定領域に対して表示される第 2の画像を形成するための第 2の副画素形成部群 とからなり、 [10] The plurality of sub-pixel forming units includes a first sub-pixel forming unit group for forming a first image displayed for a first predetermined area where a viewpoint can be arranged, and a viewpoint arrangement. A second sub-pixel forming unit group for forming a second image to be displayed with respect to a second predetermined area possible,
前記所定数の入力端子群は、前記第 1または第 2の画像を表す画像信号を受け取 るための第 1の入力端子群と、前記第 2の画像を表す画像信号を受け取るための第 2 の入力端子群とを含み、 The predetermined number of input terminal groups includes a first input terminal group for receiving an image signal representing the first or second image, and a second input terminal for receiving the image signal representing the second image. Input terminal group,
前記所定数の出力端子群は、前記第 1の入力端子群から入力される画像信号を出 力するための第 1の出力端子群と、前記第 1または第 2の入力端子群から入力される 画像信号を出力するための第 2の出力端子群とを含み、 The predetermined number of output terminal groups are input from a first output terminal group for outputting an image signal input from the first input terminal group and from the first or second input terminal group. A second output terminal group for outputting an image signal,
前記第 1の接続切換ステップでは、前記第 1の制御信号に基づき、前記第 1の入力 端子群力 入力される画像信号を出力すべき出力端子群が前記第 1の出力端子群 と前記第 2の出力端子群との間で切り換えられると共に、前記第 2の入力端子群から 入力される画像信号が前記第 2の出力端子群力 出力する力否かが切り換えられる ことを特徴とする、請求項 9に記載の駆動方法。 In the first connection switching step, based on the first control signal, the first input terminal group force is an output terminal group to which an input image signal is to be output, the first output terminal group and the second output terminal group. The output terminal group is switched between, and whether the image signal input from the second input terminal group outputs the second output terminal group force or not is switched. 9. The driving method according to 9.
[11] 前記データ信号生成ステップは、 [11] The data signal generation step includes:
前記直並列変換ステップで出力されるパラレル信号を、前記直並列変換ステップ で前記画像における 1行分の画素を表す次のシリアル信号が入力されパラレル信号
として出力されるまでの間、保持し出力する保持ステップと、 The parallel signal output in the serial-parallel conversion step is input as the next serial signal representing the pixels for one row in the image in the serial-parallel conversion step. A holding step for holding and outputting until output as
外部力も与えられる第 2の制御信号に基づき、前記保持ステップでパラレル信号 として出力される信号のうち前記 1行分の画素のそれぞれを形成する所定数の副画 素形成部が取り込むべき副画素データに相当する信号力 なる同一画素信号群を 構成する信号を順次選択して出力する第 2の接続切換ステップと、 Based on the second control signal to which an external force is also applied, sub-pixel data to be taken in by a predetermined number of sub-pixel forming units forming each of the pixels for one row of the signals output as parallel signals in the holding step A second connection switching step for sequentially selecting and outputting signals constituting the same pixel signal group having a signal power equivalent to
前記第 2の接続切換ステップで出力される信号に基づき前記複数のデータ信号 を生成し出力する信号生成出力ステップとを含むことを特徴とする、請求項 9に記載 の駆動方法。 The drive method according to claim 9, further comprising a signal generation output step of generating and outputting the plurality of data signals based on the signal output in the second connection switching step.
[12] 前記第 2の接続切換ステップは、 [12] The second connection switching step includes:
前記第 2の制御信号が第 1の所定信号である場合には、当該第 1の所定信号に 基づき、前記同一画素信号群を構成する信号を順次選択して出力するステップと、 前記第 2の制御信号が第 2の所定信号である場合には、前記同一画素信号群を 構成する全ての信号を選択して同時に出力するステップと When the second control signal is a first predetermined signal, a step of sequentially selecting and outputting signals constituting the same pixel signal group based on the first predetermined signal; and When the control signal is the second predetermined signal, selecting all the signals constituting the same pixel signal group and outputting them simultaneously; and
を含むことを特徴とする、請求項 11に記載の駆動方法。 The driving method according to claim 11, comprising:
[13] 列方向に延びる複数のデータ信号線と、当該複数のデータ信号線と交差し行方向 に延びる複数の走査信号線と、当該複数のデータ信号線と当該複数の走査信号線 との交差点にそれぞれ対応してマトリクス状に配置された複数の副画素形成部とを備 え、各副画素形成部は、対応する交差点を通る走査信号線が選択されているときに 対応するデータ信号線上の信号を副画素データとして取り込む表示装置において、 表示すべき画像を表す複数のデータ信号を前記複数のデータ信号線に印加するた めの駆動方法であって、 [13] A plurality of data signal lines extending in the column direction, a plurality of scanning signal lines intersecting with the plurality of data signal lines and extending in the row direction, and intersections of the plurality of data signal lines and the plurality of scanning signal lines A plurality of sub-pixel forming portions arranged in a matrix corresponding to each of the sub-pixel forming portions, and each sub-pixel forming portion is arranged on a corresponding data signal line when a scanning signal line passing through a corresponding intersection is selected. In a display device that captures signals as subpixel data, a driving method for applying a plurality of data signals representing an image to be displayed to the plurality of data signal lines,
前記副画素データに相当する画像信号を前記画像の少なくとも 1行分ずつ保持す る保持ステップと、 A holding step of holding an image signal corresponding to the sub-pixel data for at least one row of the image;
外部力も与えられる第 2の制御信号に基づき、前記保持ステップで保持されて!、る 画像信号のうち前記 1行分の画素のそれぞれを形成する所定数の副画素形成部が 取り込むべき副画素データに相当する信号力もなる同一画素信号群のいずれかまた は全てを選択して出力する第 2の接続切換ステップと、 Based on the second control signal to which an external force is also applied, the sub-pixel data to be taken in by a predetermined number of sub-pixel forming units that form each of the pixels for the one row of the image signal is held in the holding step! A second connection switching step of selecting and outputting any or all of the same pixel signal group having a signal power corresponding to
前記第 2の接続切換ステップで出力される信号に基づき前記複数のデータ信号を
生成するデータ信号生成ステップとを備え、 The plurality of data signals based on the signal output in the second connection switching step. A data signal generation step for generating,
前記第 2の接続切換ステップは、 The second connection switching step includes:
前記第 2の制御信号が第 1の所定信号である場合には、当該第 1の所定信号に 基づき、前記同一画素信号群を構成する信号を順次選択して出力するステップと、 前記第 2の制御信号が第 2の所定信号である場合には、前記同一画素信号群を 構成する全ての信号を選択して同時に出力するステップと When the second control signal is a first predetermined signal, a step of sequentially selecting and outputting signals constituting the same pixel signal group based on the first predetermined signal; and When the control signal is the second predetermined signal, selecting all the signals constituting the same pixel signal group and outputting them simultaneously; and
を含むことを特徴とする駆動方法。
A driving method comprising:
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2005-082277 | 2005-03-22 | ||
| JP2005082277 | 2005-03-22 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2006100951A1 true WO2006100951A1 (en) | 2006-09-28 |
Family
ID=37023618
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/JP2006/304897 WO2006100951A1 (en) | 2005-03-22 | 2006-03-13 | Circuit for driving display apparatus and method for driving display apparatus |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (1) | WO2006100951A1 (en) |
Cited By (2)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2007163719A (en) * | 2005-12-13 | 2007-06-28 | Renesas Technology Corp | Data processor |
| WO2007110993A1 (en) * | 2006-03-24 | 2007-10-04 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Signal format converter and signal format converting method for use with matrix display apparatus |
Citations (9)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JPH07152338A (en) * | 1994-09-05 | 1995-06-16 | Hitachi Ltd | Display drive |
| JPH07248467A (en) * | 1994-03-08 | 1995-09-26 | Sharp Corp | Three-dimensional information input device and three-dimensional information reproducing device |
| JPH07318858A (en) * | 1994-05-20 | 1995-12-08 | Sharp Corp | Three-dimensional information reproducing device |
| JPH09205661A (en) * | 1996-01-26 | 1997-08-05 | Sharp Corp | Viewpoint correction autostereoscopic display device |
| JP2003022057A (en) * | 2001-07-09 | 2003-01-24 | Alps Electric Co Ltd | Image signal driving circuit and display device equipped with image signal driving circuit |
| JP2003066921A (en) * | 2001-08-28 | 2003-03-05 | Sharp Corp | Drive device and display module having the same |
| JP2004120058A (en) * | 2002-09-24 | 2004-04-15 | Sharp Corp | Electronic device having 2D (two-dimensional) and 3D (three-dimensional) display functions |
| JP2005010304A (en) * | 2003-06-17 | 2005-01-13 | Sea Phone Co Ltd | Display device, control method of display device, and control program |
| JP2006030512A (en) * | 2004-07-15 | 2006-02-02 | Nec Corp | Liquid crystal display device, portable apparatus, and driving method for liquid crystal display device |
-
2006
- 2006-03-13 WO PCT/JP2006/304897 patent/WO2006100951A1/en active Application Filing
Patent Citations (9)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JPH07248467A (en) * | 1994-03-08 | 1995-09-26 | Sharp Corp | Three-dimensional information input device and three-dimensional information reproducing device |
| JPH07318858A (en) * | 1994-05-20 | 1995-12-08 | Sharp Corp | Three-dimensional information reproducing device |
| JPH07152338A (en) * | 1994-09-05 | 1995-06-16 | Hitachi Ltd | Display drive |
| JPH09205661A (en) * | 1996-01-26 | 1997-08-05 | Sharp Corp | Viewpoint correction autostereoscopic display device |
| JP2003022057A (en) * | 2001-07-09 | 2003-01-24 | Alps Electric Co Ltd | Image signal driving circuit and display device equipped with image signal driving circuit |
| JP2003066921A (en) * | 2001-08-28 | 2003-03-05 | Sharp Corp | Drive device and display module having the same |
| JP2004120058A (en) * | 2002-09-24 | 2004-04-15 | Sharp Corp | Electronic device having 2D (two-dimensional) and 3D (three-dimensional) display functions |
| JP2005010304A (en) * | 2003-06-17 | 2005-01-13 | Sea Phone Co Ltd | Display device, control method of display device, and control program |
| JP2006030512A (en) * | 2004-07-15 | 2006-02-02 | Nec Corp | Liquid crystal display device, portable apparatus, and driving method for liquid crystal display device |
Cited By (2)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2007163719A (en) * | 2005-12-13 | 2007-06-28 | Renesas Technology Corp | Data processor |
| WO2007110993A1 (en) * | 2006-03-24 | 2007-10-04 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Signal format converter and signal format converting method for use with matrix display apparatus |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| TWI447687B (en) | Liquid crystal display | |
| CN102341744B (en) | Stereoscopic display device | |
| CN101937294B (en) | Display device | |
| JP4953227B2 (en) | Display device having gate drive unit | |
| US8988312B2 (en) | Display controller, display device, image processing method, and image processing program | |
| CN101547375B (en) | Electro-optical device and electronic apparatus | |
| CN103399439B (en) | A kind of array base palte and display panels | |
| JP5544680B2 (en) | Electro-optical device, driving method thereof, and electronic apparatus | |
| CN101726894A (en) | Liquid crystal display | |
| US9049436B2 (en) | Three dimensional image display device using binocular parallax | |
| TW201430449A (en) | Two dimensional/three dimensional switchable display module and a method of driving the same | |
| WO2006100950A1 (en) | Display apparatus, circuit for driving the same, and method for driving the same | |
| JPH06265846A (en) | Active matrix liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof | |
| KR100362957B1 (en) | Display device and display system | |
| JP4053508B2 (en) | Display device driving method and display device | |
| CN111474791A (en) | Pixel structure, display panel with pixel structure and display device | |
| WO2012063788A1 (en) | Display device | |
| JPH09149434A (en) | Color stereoscopic image display device | |
| KR20150077181A (en) | Liquid crystal display | |
| WO2006100951A1 (en) | Circuit for driving display apparatus and method for driving display apparatus | |
| WO2012063787A1 (en) | Display device | |
| US20130010007A1 (en) | Electro-optical device and electronic apparatus | |
| JP4610415B2 (en) | Data content driven dual view display and circuit architecture for dual view display | |
| US7733317B2 (en) | Image display apparatus and alternative current drive method | |
| WO2007111043A1 (en) | Display device, display panel, and display method |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application | ||
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: RU |
|
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: JP |
|
| 122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 06715620 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |